JP5892345B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels on which a plurality of types of symbols as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery, and first, a bet number is determined by a player's BET operation. The reels start to rotate when the start operation is performed with the set number of bets set, and the rotation is stopped by operating a stop button provided corresponding to each reel. When all reels stop rotating, a winning combination occurs when a predetermined winning symbol combination (for example, 7-7-7, hereinafter referred to as a symbol combination) is arranged on the winning line. To do. That is, the game is advanced by the player's operation.

  These winning combinations include special roles with a transition to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, small roles with the addition of gaming values such as medals, and replays that can be played without using gaming values. There is a re-playing role accompanied by a game. These winning combinations are generally those that allow the winning combination to be awarded on the condition that a winning lottery performed simultaneously with the start operation is won.

A slot machine of this type is described in Patent Document 1.

JP 2008-93347 A

In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1 , inconvenience may occur.

An object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that has been made paying attention to such problems.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After displaying the variable display unit in a variable manner, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the winning to occur before the display result is derived;
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
State control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of states including a predetermined state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined state;
A notification control means for setting a notification condition at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game, and performing control for notifying the result information according to the determination result of the prior determination means according to the notification condition;
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous for the player when the number of elapsed games reaches the prescribed number of games;
With
The state control means includes
When the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result, it can be controlled to the advantageous state by operating in the first procedure corresponding to the first determination result, and the procedure other than the first procedure It is not controlled to the advantageous state by being operated with,
When the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result, it can be controlled to the advantageous state by being operated in a second procedure corresponding to the second determination result different from the first procedure, It is not controlled to the advantageous state by being operated by a procedure other than the second procedure,
When the determination result of the predetermination means is the first determination result or the second determination result, it is determined in advance that is neither the first procedure nor the second procedure When operated in a common procedure, do not control to the advantageous state,
Further, the slot machine does not notify the result information according to the determination result of the prior determination means by the notification control means, and is operated in the common procedure when operated in a procedure other than the common procedure. It is possible to perform a disadvantageous control that is disadvantageous for a player who will not be
The privilege granting unit does not grant the privilege even if the number of elapsed games reaches the specified number of games when the disadvantageous control is performed before the number of elapsed games reaches the specified number of games.
It is characterized by that.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After displaying the variable display unit in a variable manner, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the winning to occur before the display result is derived;
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
A state control means for controlling the favorable favorable state taking the player in accordance with the display result derived by the deriving control means,
A notification condition is set at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game, and the determination result of the prior determination unit is one of a plurality of types of notification target determination results from which an advantageous display result can be derived according to the operation procedure of the derivation operation unit A notification control means for performing control for notifying the result information according to the notification target determination result according to the notification condition ;
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous for the player when the number of elapsed games reaches the prescribed number of games;
With
The state control means includes
When the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result of the notification target determination results , an advantageous display result is derived by being operated in a first procedure corresponding to the first determination result, The advantageous display result is not derived by being operated in a procedure other than the first procedure,
When the determination result of the prior determination means is the second determination result of the notification target determination results , the operation is performed in a second procedure corresponding to the second determination result different from the first procedure. deriving a favorable display results, not derive the beneficial results displayed the by being operated in the procedure other than the second procedure,
Regardless of whether the determination result of the prior determination means is the notification target determination result , when operated in a common procedure that is neither the first procedure nor the second procedure, the advantageous display result is not derived ,
In addition, the slot machine
When the notification control means does not notify the result information according to the determination result of the prior determination means, and the operation is performed in a procedure other than the common procedure, the procedure is the first procedure and the second procedure. It is possible to perform disadvantageous control that is disadvantageous for a player who is not performed when operated by the common procedure in any of the procedures,
The privilege granting unit does not grant the privilege even if the number of games that have passed reaches the specified number of games when the disadvantageous control is performed before the number of games that have passed reaches the specified number of games. It is characterized by.
The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is:
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and a variable display device (reel 2L, 2C, 2R), the display result is derived, one game is completed, and a slot machine (where a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R)) Slot machine 1)
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display device;
When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated, depending on the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) and the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) Deriving control means for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result;
Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (BB) advantageous to the player when a special prize (special role) occurs;
After the end of the special gaming state (BB), the first of the general gaming states (preparation mode, disadvantageous RT, normal gaming state, advantageous RT, internal RT) that are gaming states other than the special gaming state (BB) A first gaming state transition means for transitioning to a gaming state (preparation mode);
After the start of the first gaming state (preparation mode), the general gaming state is reached when the number of games that have passed without a predetermined transition condition (stopping special outcome) reaching the prescribed number of games (10). A second gaming state transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state (disadvantage RT),
Transition to the third gaming state (normal gaming state) of the general gaming state when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (preparation mode) and the second gaming state (disadvantaged RT) Third game state transition means for causing
When an advantageous display result (promotional replay symbol combination) is derived in the third gaming state (normal gaming state), the player is more likely than the third gaming state (normal gaming state) in the general gaming state. A transition to a fourth gaming state (advantageous RT) that does not transition from the first gaming state (preparation mode) and the second gaming state (disadvantaged RT), The fourth gaming state transition that does not shift to the fourth gaming state (advantageous RT) by deriving a display result different from the advantageous display result (promotional replay symbol combination) in the gaming state (normal gaming state) Means,
When a disadvantage display result (penalty replay symbol combination) is derived in the third gaming state, a fifth disadvantage that is more disadvantageous to the player than the third gaming state (normal gaming state) in the general gaming state A fifth gaming state transition means for transitioning to a gaming state (penalty RT);
Notification control means for setting a notification condition at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game, and performing control for notifying result information (navigation effect) according to the determination result of the prior determination means according to the notification condition;
With
The first gaming state (preparation mode) is a gaming state having a higher game value grant rate than the second gaming state (disadvantaged RT) and the third gaming state (normal gaming state),
The derivation control means includes
A determination result (Lip GR1) that the determination result of the prior determination means allows the generation of a winning including at least one of a first winning (penalty replay) and a second winning (promotion replay) among a plurality of types of winnings. When the derivation operation means is operated with a predetermined common operation mode (left push) regardless of the type of the determination result, the advantageous display result (promotion replay) The display result is different from the disadvantageous display result (penalty replay symbol combination).
When the determination result of the prior determination means is one of a plurality of types of determination results (Lip GR1, Lip GR2) including the first winning (penalty replay) in a winning that is allowed to occur, the common An operation mode that is different from the operation mode (left push) and is determined according to the type of the determination result, and according to the type of another determination result among a plurality of types of determination results including the first prize When the derivation operation means is operated in a specific operation mode (right press for Lip GR1 and middle press for Lip GR2) different from the operation mode defined in the above, the disadvantage display result (design combination of penalty replay) is derived, When the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a display result different from the disadvantage display result is derived,
The determination is made when the determination result of the prior determination means is one of a plurality of types of determination results (Lip GR1, Lip GR2) including the second winning (promotion replay) in a winning that is allowed to occur. The same operation mode as any one of the specific operation modes for deriving the disadvantage display result when the determination result is a determination result that is different from the result and includes the first winning in a winning that is allowed to occur, and An advantageous operation mode (repeat) that is different from the operation mode determined according to the type of other determination results among the plurality of types of determination results including the second prize, which is an operation mode determined according to the type of the determination result. When the derivation operation means is operated with the middle press for GR1 and the right press for Lip GR2, the advantage display result (the symbol combination of promotion replay) is derived, In when the deriving operation means is operated is operated embodiment is characterized in that for deriving the result the advantageous display result displayed differently.
According to this feature, when the game state is the third gaming state, the display result different from the advantageous display result and different from the disadvantageous display result is derived as long as the operation is performed in a common operation mode. Although it is not controlled to the gaming state of 4, the third gaming state is continued without being controlled by the fifth gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the operation state is different from the common operation mode in the third gaming state, the advantageous display result may be derived and controlled to the fourth gaming state advantageous to the player. There is a possibility that the disadvantageous display result is derived and the game state is controlled to the fifth gaming state which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, since the advantageous operation mode for deriving the advantageous display result is the same as any one of the specific operation modes for deriving the disadvantageous display result, the control is not performed when the result information is not controlled. Cannot be operated in an advantageous manner of operation. For this reason, when it is the 3rd gaming state and control for reporting result information is not performed, if it operates by operation modes other than a common operation mode, it will control to the 5th gaming state which is disadvantageous for a player. You risk taking it. As a result, in the third gaming state, when the control for notifying the result information is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from operating in an operation mode other than the common operation mode. The third gaming state can be continued. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust that the advantageous display result is derived but not controlled to the fourth gaming state.
In addition, the fourth advantage that is advantageous to the player can be achieved by making the operation mode other than the common operation mode only when the control for notifying the result information is performed in the third game state. The advantage of the fourth gaming state can be maintained by preventing the gaming state from being controlled, that is, by controlling the transition to the fourth gaming state that can be shifted to any time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by performing control for notifying the result information and controlling to the fourth gaming state.
In addition, after the special game state ends, the game state does not immediately shift to the fourth game state advantageous to the player, but passes through a plurality of game states such as the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state. Otherwise, the game state will not be shifted to the fourth game state, so that it is possible to enhance the interest until the transition to the fourth game state advantageous to the player after the special game state is ended.
In addition, after the special game state ends, the game state cannot be shifted to the fourth game state without passing through the first game state and the third game state, and the transition to the fourth game state is delayed accordingly. However, the first gaming state that transitions after the end of the special gaming state has a higher game value grant rate than the third gaming state that has the longest stay period, and therefore transitions to the fourth gaming state. Can reduce the loss associated with the delay. In particular, in the situation where the notification of the result information has already been decided, it becomes possible to reduce the disadvantageous period as much as possible other than the period until the transition from the third gaming state to the fourth gaming state. The interruption of continuity can be reduced as much as possible.
Also, the first gaming state having a higher game value grant rate than the third gaming state, even if the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied and the transition to the third gaming state does not occur, Since the game state shifts to the second game state having a lower game value grant rate than the first game state, the first game state continues for a long period of time after the special game state ends. It will not be advantageous to.
The operation mode of the derivation operation means may be the timing at which the derivation operation means is operated, or the variable display device is composed of a plurality of variable display units and is operated when each of the display results is derived. If the derivation operation means are provided individually, the order in which the derivation operation means are operated may be used.
The plurality of types of determination results including the first prize and the plurality of types of determination results including the second prize each include the second prize in the plurality of types of determination results including the first prize and include the second prize. The determination result including the first prize may be included in the plurality of types of determination results, and the plurality of types of determination results including the first prize and the plurality of types of determination results including the second prize are the same determination result. There may be a determination result that does not include the second prize in the plurality of types of determination results including the first prize and does not include the first prize in the plurality of types of determination results including the second prize.
Further, the fourth gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the third gaming state may be a gaming state in which a game value grant rate is higher than that of the third gaming state, Although the grant rate is almost the same as the third gaming state, it may be a gaming state in which there is a possibility of shifting to a gaming state that is more advantageous than the third gaming state.
Further, the fifth gaming state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the third gaming state, may be a gaming state in which the game value grant rate is lower than that in the third gaming state, or the gaming value Although the grant rate is almost the same as the third gaming state, there is no possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the third gaming state such as the fourth gaming state, or the possibility is higher than the third gaming state. It may be a low gaming state.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1,
When the notification control means is not performing control (AT) for notifying the result information in the third game state (normal game state), the operation mode by the derivation operation means is the common operation. When the operation mode is other than the mode (left push), the player performs disadvantageous control (control during the penalty period) that is not performed when the common operation mode (left press) is performed, When the notification setting condition (AT lottery condition) for setting the notification condition is satisfied when the disadvantageous control is performed (during the penalty period), the notification condition is set when the disadvantageous control is not performed. It is characterized by lowering the degree of advantage for the player than when the notification setting condition (AT lottery condition) for setting is satisfied.
According to this feature, when control for notifying the result information is not performed, disadvantageous control is performed when operated in an operation mode other than the common operation mode. Thereby, when it is a 3rd gaming state and the control for alerting | reporting result information is not performed, it can prevent a player from operating in operation modes other than a common operation mode more reliably. Further, as disadvantageous control, it is possible to cause a disadvantage that the degree of advantage for the player when the notification setting condition is satisfied is reduced, and control for notifying result information is further difficult to be performed. For this reason, in the 3rd gaming state where control for reporting result information is not performed, it can control more effectively that it operates in operation modes other than a common operation mode.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1 or 2,
When the control for notifying the result information is not performed by the notification control means (non-AT), the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R) is provided with warning effect means for performing a predetermined warning effect (warning display) when operated.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively suppress operation in an operation mode other than the common operation mode.

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The derivation control means operates the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) in the common operation mode (left push) when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a predetermined determination result. On the condition that the predetermined display result (special appearance) is derived,
The predetermined transition condition is that the predetermined display result (special appearance) is derived.
According to this feature, the operation mode for shifting from the first game state and the second game state to the third game state is the same as the common operation mode in which disadvantageous control is not performed in the third game state. Therefore, it is not necessary to use different operation modes for the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and when the control for notifying the result information is not performed in the third gaming state, and the player Will not be confused.

The slot machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The notification control means does not perform control (AT) for notifying the result information in the first gaming state (preparation mode) and the second gaming state (disadvantaged RT).
According to this feature, after the end of the special gaming state, the result information is not notified until the transition to the third gaming state, the advantage by the special gaming state, the advantage by the notification of the result information, Can be prevented from being excessively increased, resulting in extremely high euphoria.

The slot machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
Comprising notification condition determining means (AT lottery 2) for determining the notification condition when it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize (special role) is allowed;
The notification condition determining means determines that the occurrence of the special prize (special combination) is permitted in the first gaming state (preparation mode) or the second gaming state (disadvantaged RT). It is characterized in that the ratio of determining advantageous notification conditions (the number of navigation stock) is higher than when it is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize (special role) in the gaming state (normal gaming state) of 3 .
According to this feature, even if a state in which it is not possible to shift to the third gaming state that can shift to the fourth gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the special gaming state continues, the notification condition Since there is a high possibility that an advantageous notification condition is determined by the determining means, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player who cannot be shifted to the third gaming state.
Note that the notification condition determined by the notification condition determination means corresponds to the probability of notifying the result information, the probability of granting the right to notify the result information, the number of rights granted, and the like.

It has been common practice to draw a role at the same time as the start operation and win a winning combination on the condition that the lottery has been won. There is a method in which a counter for updating the counter is provided, and when a start operation is detected, the numerical value of the counter is extracted and the extracted value is used as a random number (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-152268).
In this way, when the start operation is detected, the counter value is extracted and the lottery is performed. After the start operation is detected and the counter value is extracted, noise is generated in the signal line of the start operation due to static electricity or the like. Thus, when a numerical value is extracted from the counter again, a lottery is performed with a numerical value different from the numerical value extracted by detecting the start operation.
As a method of solving this problem, a method of extracting a numerical value from the counter once and holding it until the extracted numerical value is read out is conceivable. Even if it is made during a period that is not valid, the numerical value extracted from the counter remains held, and a new problem that the lottery is performed by the numerical value extracted at a timing different from the timing at which the original start operation was performed Will occur.

Therefore, the slot machine of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
First detection means (a latch flip-flop 557A) for detecting that a predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) is input;
Second detection means (switch input determination processing) for detecting that the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) is input;
Numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) for updating numerical data;
Updated by the numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) based on the detection of the input of the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) by the first detecting means (latch flip-flop 557A). Random number extraction means (random number latch selector 558A) for extracting numerical data as a random value and storing it in a first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D);
After the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area (random value register R1D) by the random number extraction means (random number latch selector 558A), the random number extraction is performed until the stored numerical data is read out. New numerical data is not stored by the means (random number latch selector 558A), and numerical data holding means (new data) that holds the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D) Prohibiting the latching of numerical data)
A numerical value for determining whether or not numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D) at every fixed time (about 2.24 ms) (whether or not the random number latch flag is set). Data storage judging means;
When the numerical data storage determining means determines that numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D) (the random number latch flag is set), the first numerical data By reading the numerical data stored in the storage area (random value register R1D), the numerical data holding unit releases the numerical data, and the read numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area ( Numerical data reading means for storing in a second numerical data storage area (random value storage work) different from the random value register R1D);
Based on the fact that the second detection means (switch input determination processing) has detected the input of the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7), it is stored in the second numerical data storage area (random number storage work). Game-related decision processing means (internal lottery) for performing a process for making a decision related to a game using the numerical data that is stored,
Game data holding means (backup power supply) for holding at least a part of game data (stored data in the RAM 507) even when power supply to the slot machine (slot machine 1) is stopped;
When power interruption conditions (detection of a voltage drop signal) are established, power interruption processing (electric power interruption processing (power interruption processing ()) is made possible based on the game data (stored in the RAM 507) held by the game data holding means. Power interruption processing execution means for executing main)),
A start command means for performing a start command (user reset) when the power supply continues for a certain time without stopping after the power cut processing (power cut processing (main));
Control state return means for returning to the control state before the power interruption process based on the game data (stored in the RAM 507) held by the game data holding means in response to the activation command (user reset);
Numeric data is stored in the first numeric data storage area (random number register R1D) in a period of waiting for the power supply to stop after execution of the power interruption process (power interruption process (main)). If it is determined whether the numerical data is stored, the stored numerical data is read to read out the stored numerical data by the numerical data holding means. Time holding release means (dummy reading of numerical data after power interruption processing),
It is preferable to provide.
According to such a configuration, it is determined whether or not numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area at regular intervals, and when numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area. The numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area is read out, and the numerical data holding means is released from the numerical data holding means, and the first numerical data storage area is caused by noise or the like. Even if the numerical data is stored and the numerical data is retained, the state does not continue for a certain period of time, and the timing for performing the process for making a decision related to the game with the detection of a predetermined signal It becomes possible to acquire the numerical data extracted in (1).
The numerical data storage determining means determines that new numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area, and whenever the numerical data is read from the first numerical data storage area, the second numerical data is stored. The numerical data in the storage area is updated to the numerical data read from the first numerical data storage area, that is, the newly extracted numerical data, and the game-related determination processing means is stored in the first numerical data storage area. Since the numerical data stored in the second numerical data storage area is used instead of the stored numerical data, noise is added to the signal line after the numerical data is read from the first numerical data storage area. Even if the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area changes, the numerical data in the second numerical data storage area used by the game related determination processing means is affected. No Rukoto, even if such a determination can be made relating to the game by using the numerical data given signal is extracted by the detected timing.
In addition, if the power supply is not stopped after a certain period of time when the voltage drop temporarily due to a momentary power failure and the power interruption process is executed, a start command is issued and the original state is restored. When the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area during the period when the power supply is stopped, the numerical data is read and the numerical data is held by the numerical data holding means. Is released, the voltage temporarily becomes unstable, such as a momentary power failure, noise is applied to the signal line, and the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area, and the state is maintained. Even if it remains untouched, it will be immediately read out and new numerical data can be stored in the first numerical data storage area. Numerical data Without relevant decision will be made in the game with, it can be prevented from decisions related to the game by using the numerical data extracted at a timing different from that of the original trigger will be performed.

The slot machine of the present invention
First detection means (a latch flip-flop 557A) for detecting that a predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) is input;
Second detection means (switch input determination processing) for detecting that the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) is input;
Numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) for updating numerical data;
Updated by the numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) based on the detection of the input of the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) by the first detecting means (latch flip-flop 557A). Random number extraction means (random number latch selector 558A) for extracting numerical data as a random value and storing it in a first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D);
After the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area (random value register R1D) by the random number extraction means (random number latch selector 558A), the random number extraction is performed until the stored numerical data is read out. New numerical data is not stored by the means (random number latch selector 558A), and numerical data holding means (new data) that holds the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D) Prohibiting the latching of numerical data)
Interrupt generating means for generating an interrupt (random number latch interrupt) when numerical data is stored in the numerical data storage area (random number register R1D);
By reading the numerical data stored in the numerical data storage area (random number value register R1D) in response to the interrupt generation means generating the interrupt (random number latch interrupt), the numerical data The holding of the numerical data by the holding means is released, and the read numerical data is stored in a second numerical data storage area (random number storage work) different from the first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D). Numerical data reading means (random value latch interrupt processing (modification)),
Based on the fact that the second detection means (switch input determination processing) has detected the input of the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7), it is stored in the second numerical data storage area (random number storage work). Game-related decision processing means (internal lottery) for performing a process for making a decision related to a game using the numerical data that is stored,
Game data holding means (backup power supply) for holding at least part of game data (stored data in the RAM 507) even when power supply to the gaming machine (slot machine 1) is stopped;
When power interruption conditions (detection of a voltage drop signal) are established, power interruption processing (electric power interruption processing (power interruption processing ()) is made possible based on the game data (stored in the RAM 507) held by the game data holding means. Power interruption processing execution means for executing main)),
A start command means for performing a start command (user reset) when the power supply continues for a certain time without stopping after the power cut processing (power cut processing (main));
Control state return means for returning to the control state before the power interruption process based on the game data (stored in the RAM 507) held by the game data holding means in response to the activation command (user reset);
Numeric data is stored in the first numeric data storage area (random number register R1D) in a period of waiting for the power supply to stop after execution of the power interruption process (power interruption process (main)). If it is determined whether the numerical data is stored, the stored numerical data is read to read out the stored numerical data by the numerical data holding means. Time holding release means (dummy reading of numerical data after power interruption processing),
It is good also as a structure provided with.
According to such a configuration, an interruption occurs when numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area, and the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area is read in response to the interrupt. Even if numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area due to noise or the like, the numerical data is immediately stored in response to the occurrence of an interrupt. Since the data is read out and new numerical data can be stored, the timing for performing the process for making a decision related to the game with the detection of a predetermined signal even if the numerical data is stored due to noise or the like It becomes possible to acquire the numerical data extracted in (1).
Further, every time numerical data is read from the first numerical data storage area when new numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area and an interruption occurs, the numerical data in the second numerical data storage area Is updated to the numerical data read from the first numerical data storage area, that is, the newly extracted numerical data, and the game-related determining means stores the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area. Instead, since the numerical data stored in the second numerical data storage area is used, after the numerical data is read from the first numerical data storage area, the numerical data changes due to noise on the signal line. Even in such a case, there is no effect on the numerical data in the second numerical data storage area used by the game-related determining means. In the extracted numerical data can make a decision related to the game using.
In addition, if the power supply is not stopped after a certain period of time when the voltage drop temporarily due to a momentary power failure and the power interruption process is executed, a start command is issued and the original state is restored. When the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area during the period when the power supply is stopped, the numerical data is read and the numerical data is held by the numerical data holding means. Is released, the voltage temporarily becomes unstable, such as a momentary power failure, noise is applied to the signal line, and the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area, and the state is maintained. Even if it remains untouched, it will be immediately read out and new numerical data can be stored in the first numerical data storage area. Numerical data Without relevant decision will be made in the game with, it can be prevented from decisions related to the game by using the numerical data extracted at a timing different from that of the original trigger will be performed.

In the above description, the numerical data holding means stores the numerical value by the random number extracting means until the stored numerical data is read after the numerical data is stored by the random number extracting means in the first numerical data storage area. By prohibiting new extraction of data, the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area may be retained, or numerical values may be stored in the first numerical data storage area by the random number extraction means. After the data is stored, until the stored numerical data is read, even if numerical data is extracted by the random number extraction means, the storage in the first numerical data storage area is prohibited by The numerical data stored in one numerical data storage area may be held.
The game-related determination processing means may perform a process for making a decision related to a game, or may be a process for making a decision related to a game itself, or a process for making a decision related to a game. It may be a process of determining numerical data as a lottery value. In the latter case, it is not necessary to make a decision related to the game at that time.
The first detection means is detection means for detecting an input of a predetermined signal that triggers the random number extraction means to extract numerical data, and the second detection means is the game-related determination processing means. Is a detection means for detecting the input of a predetermined signal that triggers a process for making a decision related to a game, and the first detection means and the second detection means are configured separately. good. The predetermined signal detection method by the first detection means and the predetermined signal detection method by the second detection means may be the same method or different methods.

The game-related determination processing means is provided on the condition that the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) is continuously detected for a predetermined period (about 2.24 ms) by the second detection means (switch input determination processing). In addition, it is preferable to perform a process (internal lottery) for making a decision related to the game.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a process for making a decision related to a game from being performed even if a predetermined signal is erroneously detected due to noise such as static electricity.

A non-volatile memory (ROM 506) for storing an identification code (ID number) individually assigned to each gaming machine;
Initial numerical data generation means (random number circuit setting) for generating initial numerical data (start value of numerical data) based on the identification code (ID number) stored in the nonvolatile memory (ROM 506) when power supply is started Processing) and
Further comprising
The numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) is configured to calculate the numerical value from initial numerical data (start value of numerical data) generated by the initial numerical data generating means (random number circuit setting process) when power supply is started. It is preferable to start updating the data.
According to such a configuration, updating of the numerical data is started from the initial numerical data generated based on the identification code individually assigned to each gaming machine. Since it becomes difficult to specify the numerical data, it is possible to effectively prevent an unauthorized act of detecting a predetermined signal aiming at the timing of the specific numerical data.

Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game is further provided,
The numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) inputs an operation clock (random number clock) having a different period from the operation clock (control clock) for operating the game control means (main control unit 41). It is preferable to update the numerical data.
According to such a configuration, since the operation of the game control means and the update cycle of the numerical data are synchronized, it is possible to prevent the random number value used by the game-related determining means from being biased and the game control means Even if a fraudulent board is connected, it is impossible to specify the update period of the numerical data from the operation of the game control means. Therefore, it is effective to detect the predetermined signal aiming at the timing of the specific numerical data. Can be prevented.

The numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) inputs an operation clock (random number clock) with a predetermined period to update the numerical data,
The slot machine changes the operation state of the numerical data update means (random number sequence change circuit 555) based on the input state of the operation clock (random number clock) input to the numerical data update means (random number sequence change circuit 555). It is preferable to include operation clock abnormality determining means (random circuit abnormality inspection processing) for determining whether an abnormality has occurred.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which processing for making a decision related to a game is performed while the numerical data is not normally updated by the numerical data updating means, that is, the numerical data is fixed. .

An LED display (credit display 11) composed of light emitting diodes;
Clocking means (watchdog timer 49a) for clocking based on the counter value;
Counter value initialization means for initializing (clearing) the counter value of the time measuring means (watchdog timer 49a) based on an input of a drive signal for dynamically lighting the LED indicator (credit indicator 11);
Further comprising
The power interruption process (power interruption process (main)) includes a process (output port initialization) for stopping output of a drive signal for dynamically lighting the LED display (credit display 11),
The start command means may execute the start command (user reset) when the counter value by the time counting means (watchdog timer 49a) reaches a predetermined threshold without being initialized (when overflowed). preferable.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether or not it is operating normally only by monitoring the drive signal of the LED display.

Initial numerical data generation means (random number circuit setting processing) for generating initial numerical data (initial value of random number) when power supply starts is further provided,
The numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) is configured to obtain the numerical data from the initial numerical data (initial value of random number) generated by the initial numerical data generating means (random number circuit setting process) when power supply is started. Update of the numerical data is continued even during a period of waiting for power supply to stop after execution of the power interruption process (power interruption process (main)), and the power interruption process When the control state return means returns the control state by the start command (user reset) without stopping the power supply after the (power interruption processing (main)) is executed, the initial numerical data (initial number of random numbers) It is preferable to continue updating the numerical data without using a value.
According to such a configuration, even if the activation command is intentionally performed, the update of the numerical data continues, so it becomes difficult to specify the timing at which the update of the numerical data is started. It is possible to effectively prevent a fraud in which a predetermined signal is detected aiming at.

It is a front view of a slot machine which is an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine . It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in a main control part. It is a figure which illustrates the main part of a program management area and a built-in register. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in a header and function setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in 1st random number initial setting, 2nd random number initial setting, and interruption initial setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in security time setting. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an internal information register. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a random number circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number sequence change register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change operation | movement of the random number update rule by a random number sequence change circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change operation | movement of the random number update rule by a random number sequence change circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random value acquisition register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number latch selection register. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a random value register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number latch flag register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number interrupt control register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an input port register. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a serial communication circuit. It is a figure which shows the transmission condition of the command by a serial communication circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of an external output board | substrate, and an example of an external output signal. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (main) which a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the security check process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random number circuit setting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random circuit abnormality inspection process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the command storage process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process which a main control part performs when an error generate | occur | produces. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which a main control part performs after a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs for every fixed interval. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs for every fixed interval. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the switch input determination process which a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random value reading process which a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the door monitoring process which a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the command transmission process which a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the power interruption process (main) performed according to having detected the power interruption in the timer interruption process (main). It is a timing chart for demonstrating operation | movement in a random number circuit. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between operation of a start switch, and a random value register. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between operation of a start switch, and a random value register. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random value latch interruption process which a main control part performs when numerical data is latched in the random number circuit in a modification. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the operation of the start switch in a modification, and a random value register. It is a timing chart which shows the detection condition of a start switch. 5 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the status register value of the serial communication circuit and the transfer permission / prohibition of door command and operation detection command. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and the technical matter relevant to a winning combination, (b) is a symbol combination and special combination of a predetermined special appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to an appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when several replays win simultaneously, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning a grape, (c) These are figures for demonstrating the reel control in the case of winning a cherry. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs 1st AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 1st AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 1st AT lottery. It is a flowchart for demonstrating point related processing. It is a figure for demonstrating point provision conditions. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for determining a grant point. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing difference number corresponding | compatible notification lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing notification total lot notification lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs 2nd AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 2nd AT lottery. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a ceiling game arrival process and a navigable period setting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a navigable period setting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a navigation effect execution process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a penalty setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing a notification lottery in a modification.

      Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied, will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side end of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is pivotally supported by the front door 1b.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

On the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R , "watermelon", "replay", "white grape", "black grape", "cherry", "white plum", "black plum", "black 7" A plurality of types of symbols such as “White 7” and “BAR” that are mutually distinguishable are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3 ), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. Further, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and the back surface further has a concealing member for concealing the inside. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front door 1b, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) are used for one medal. Using a single BET switch 5 and credits that are operated when setting the bet number, an operation is performed when setting the maximum bet number among the prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state within the range. The MAXBET switch 6 to be operated, and the settlement switch 10 operated when the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the betting amount are settled (the medal used for setting the credits and the betting amount is returned). The start switch 7 that is operated when starting the game, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. It is provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in BB, which will be described later, and an error code that indicates the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3 ) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective . Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R for informing that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting ( FIG. 3 ) is provided.

Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 on the side of a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 1a or A medal selector having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that is inserted from the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion unit 4 and selectively flows to the hopper tank 34a side to selectively switch to one of the medal payout exits 9 side. not shown), see the door opening detection switch 25 (FIG. 3 for detecting the open state of the front door 1b), hitting stop state (reset operation is performed at BB end of later A stop switch 36a for selecting valid / invalid of the stop function to be controlled to a state where the progress of the game is restricted), automatic settlement processing at the end of BB (to be described later) An automatic settlement switch 36b is provided for selecting whether to enable / disable the automatic settlement function that is controlled for settlement (returning regardless of operation).

As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 3 ), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front face of the power supply box 100, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or the above-described stop state in a normal state. Are provided with a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery, which will be described later, and a power switch 39 that is operated when the power is turned on / off. ing.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 1) become valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a winning line L1 set across the upper row of the reel 2L, the middle row of the reel 2C, the lower row of the reel 2R, that is, the symbols arranged in the lower right direction, the lower row of the reel 2L, the reel In the middle stage of 2C, the upper stage of reel 2R, that is, the winning line L2 set across the symbols that are lined up to the right, the upper stage of reel 2L, the middle stage of reel 2C, the upper stage of reel 2R, that is, the symbols arranged in a V shape The four types of winning lines L3, the lower line of the reel 2L, the middle part of the reel 2C, the lower part of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L4 set across the inverted V-shaped symbols, are the winning lines. It has been established.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a combination of symbols (hereinafter also referred to as roles) that are validated and predetermined on the winning line is each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. When the display result is stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of winning lines that are activated, the number of payouts determined for each of the combinations of symbols that are activated and aligned on the winning line is totaled, The total number of medals will be awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game, and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. It will be. In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the winning line, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols. ing.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated and the symbols start to change, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds). The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead is used. Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3 , the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is The power supply board 101 generates the driving power for the electrical components that make up the slot machine 1 and supplies it to each unit.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. In addition, a command transmission line from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91, which will be described later, and a power supply line for supplying power from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 are connected via a single cable and connector. Are connected to each other, and all the connectors that connect these cables and the respective boards are connected to each other so that the respective parts on the side of the effect control board 90 can operate and receive commands from the main control part 41. Become. For this reason, unless the command transmission line for transmitting a command from the main control unit 41 is connected to the effect control board 90, power is not supplied to the effect control board 90, and only the effect control board 90 side operates. There is no end to it.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, A stop switch 36a, an automatic checkout switch 36b, and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a main control unit 41, a control clock generation circuit 42, a random number clock generation circuit 43, a switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45, a solenoid drive circuit 46, an LED drive circuit 47, and a power interruption detection circuit. 48 and a reset circuit 49 are mounted.

  The main control unit 41 is configured by a one-chip microcomputer, executes a control program stored in a ROM 506, which will be described later, and performs processing related to the progress of the game, and also includes a control circuit mounted on the game control board 40. Control each part directly or indirectly.

The control clock generation circuit 42 generates a control clock CCLK serving as an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency outside the main control unit 41. The control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 is supplied to the clock circuit 502 via the control external clock terminal EXC of the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 4A , for example. The random number clock generation circuit 43 generates a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, outside the main control unit 41. The random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 is supplied to the random number circuit 509 via the random number external clock terminal ERC of the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 4A , for example. As an example, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 may be set to be equal to or lower than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42.

The switch detection circuit 44 takes in detection signals input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 and transmits them to the main control unit 41. The motor drive circuit 45 transmits the motor drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30. The LED drive circuit transmits the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a voltage drop is detected. The reset circuit 49 provides a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in a state where the power is unstable, such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. The reset circuit 49 has a built-in watchdog timer 49a (see FIG. 4B ). When the watchdog timer 49a times out, that is, when the operation of the CPU 505 of the main control unit 41 is stopped for a certain time, A user reset signal is given to the control unit 41.

FIG. 4A shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. 4A is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a specific information storage circuit 503, a reset / interrupt controller 504, a CPU 505, and a ROM 506. A RAM 507, a CTC (counter / timer circuit) 508, a random number circuit 509, a PIP (parallel input port) 510, a serial communication circuit 511, and an address decode circuit 512.

FIG. 5 shows an example of an address map in the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 5 , the area from address 0000H to address 1FFFH is allocated to the ROM 506 and includes a user program area and a program management area. FIG. 6A shows an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the program management area in the ROM 506. The area from address 2000H to address 20FFH is a built-in register area assigned to the built-in register of the main control unit 41. FIG. 6B shows an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the built-in register area. An area from address 7E00H to address 7FFFH is a work area assigned to the RAM 507, and can be assigned to an I / O map or a memory map. An area from address FDD0H to address FDFBH is an XCS decode area allocated to the address decode circuit 512.

The program management area is a storage area for storing information necessary for the CPU 505 to execute the user program. As shown in FIG. 6A, the program management area includes a header KHDR, a function setting KFCS, a first random number initial setting KRS1, a second random number initial setting KRS2, an interrupt initial setting KIIS, a security time setting KSES, include.

A header KHDR stored in the program management area indicates reading setting of internal data in the main control unit 41. FIG. 7A illustrates the correspondence between setting data and operation in the header KHDR. Here, the main control unit 41 can set a ROM read prevention function and a bus output mask function. The ROM read prevention function is a function for permitting or prohibiting the read operation for the data stored in the ROM 506 provided in the main control unit 41. When the read prohibition is set, the data stored in the ROM 506 cannot be read. The bus output mask function is used for address bus output, data bus output, and control signal output in the external bus interface 501 when an external device connected to the external bus interface 501 makes a read request for internal data of the main control unit 41. This function disables reading of internal data from an external device by applying a mask. As shown in FIG. 7A, the operation combination of the ROM read prevention function and the bus output mask function is set differently in accordance with the setting data of the header KHDR. Of the setting data shown in FIG. 7A, the setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as bus output mask valid data. Further, the setting data (all “00H”) in which ROM reading is prohibited and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as ROM reading prohibiting data. The setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask becomes invalid is also referred to as bus output mask invalid data.

The function setting KFCS stored in the program management area indicates the operation setting of the watchdog timer in the main control unit 41 and the use setting of various function shared terminals. FIG. 7B shows an example of setting contents in the function setting KFCS.

The bit number [7-5] of the function setting KFCS indicates, for example, permission / prohibition of the operation of the watchdog timer that can be set as an interrupt factor in the reset / interrupt controller 504, and the cycle when it is permitted. In this embodiment, since an external watchdog timer is used, the watchdog timer is set to prohibit operation. The bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS indicates that the predetermined function shared terminal (first shared terminal) in the main control unit 41 is the second channel transmission terminal TXB used by the serial communication circuit 511 or the address decoding circuit 512. Is a TXB terminal setting that designates whether to use the chip select output terminal XCS13. In the example shown in FIG. 7B , if the bit value in the bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the first shared terminal is used for the second channel transmission in the serial communication circuit 511. This is the setting for the 2-channel transmission terminal TXB. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the first dual-purpose terminal is set to the chip select output terminal XCS13 used in the address decode circuit 512. In this embodiment, the bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS is set to “0” and the first shared terminal is set to the second channel transmission terminal TXB, so that serial communication with the effect control board 90 is possible. To.

The bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS indicates that the predetermined function shared terminal (second shared terminal) in the main control unit 41 is the first channel transmission terminal TXA used by the serial communication circuit 511 or the address decoding circuit 512. Is a TXA terminal setting indicating whether the chip select output terminal XCS12 is used. In the example shown in FIG. 7B , if the bit value in the bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the second shared terminal is used for the first channel transmission in the serial communication circuit 511. 1 channel transmission terminal TXA is set. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the second dual-purpose terminal is set to the chip select output terminal XCS12 used in the address decode circuit 512. In this embodiment, the bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS is set to “0” and the second shared terminal is set to the first channel transmission terminal TXA, but the first channel reception is not used.

For the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS, a predetermined function shared terminal (third shared terminal) in the main control unit 41 is used as the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511 or is used by the PIP 510. This is an RXA terminal setting indicating whether the input port is P5. In the example shown in FIG. 7B , if the bit value in the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the third shared terminal is used for the first channel reception in the serial communication circuit 511. 1 channel receiving terminal RXA is set. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the third shared terminal is set to the input port P5 used in the PIP 510. In this embodiment, the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS is set to “0” and the third shared terminal is set to the first channel reception terminal RXA, but the first channel reception is not used.

The bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is an input used by the PIP 510 or a predetermined function shared terminal (fourth shared terminal) in the main control unit 41 as an external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 505 or the like. This is an NMI connection setting indicating whether to set the port P4. In the example shown in FIG. 7B , if the bit value [1] in the bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the setting of the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI whose fourth shared terminal is connected to the CPU 505 and the like (CPU connection). On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the fourth shared terminal is set for the input port P4 used in the PIP 510 (CPU disconnected). In this embodiment, the bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is set to “1” and the fourth shared terminal is set to the input port P4 used in the PIP 510, but the input port P4 is unused. .

The bit number [0] of the function setting KFCS is an input used by the PIP 510, or the predetermined function shared terminal (fifth shared terminal) in the main control unit 41 is set to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like. This is an XINT connection setting indicating whether to set the port P3. In the example shown in FIG. 7B , if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the setting of the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT in which the fifth shared terminal is connected to the CPU 505 and the like (CPU connection). On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the fifth shared terminal is set for the input port P3 used in the PIP 510 (CPU disconnected).

The first random number initial setting KRS1 and the second random number initial setting KRS2 stored in the program management area indicate the initial setting of the random number circuit 509. FIG. 8A shows an example of setting contents in the first random number initial setting KRS1. FIG. 8B shows an example of setting contents in the second random number initial setting KRS2.

The bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is a random number circuit use setting indicating whether to use the random number circuit 509 or not. In the example shown in FIG. 8A , if the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “0”, the random number circuit 509 is not used (unused), but “1”. "Is set to use the random number circuit 509 (use). In this embodiment, the random number circuit 509 is set to be usable by setting the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 to “1”.

The bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 uses the random number update clock RGK (see FIG. 11 ) used for updating the numerical data as the random number value in the random number circuit 509 as the internal system clock SCLK or for the random number. This is a random number update clock setting indicating whether the clock RCLK is divided by two. In the example shown in FIG. 8A , if the bit value in the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “0”, the internal system clock SCLK is set to be used as the random number update clock RGK. If it is 1 ″, the random number clock RCLK is divided by two and used as the random number update clock RGK. In the present embodiment, the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1”, and the random number clock RCLK is divided by two to be used as the random number update clock RGK.

The bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is a random number update rule setting indicating whether or not to change the random number update rule in the random number circuit 509 and the change method in the case of the change. In the example shown in FIG. 8A , if the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “00”, the random number update rule is not changed, and if it is “01”. The setting for changing the random number update rule by software is made after the second round, and if it is “10”, the random number update rule is automatically changed after the second round.

The bit number [3-2] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to a fixed bit value “00”. Note that “B” of “00B” in FIG. 8B indicates binary display. The bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 indicates the setting relating to the start value in the numerical data that becomes the random value in the random number circuit 509. In the example shown in FIG. 8B , if the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “0”, the start value is set to a predetermined default value 0001H, while “1”. Is set to a value based on an ID number, which is unique identification information given to each main control unit 41. In the example shown in FIG. 8B , if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “0”, the start value is not changed every time the system is reset. When it is 1 ″, the start value is changed every time the system is reset.

  In the present embodiment, the bit value at the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1”, and the bit value at the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1”. Each time the system is reset, a value based on the ID number is set as the start value.

  When the start value is set to a value based on the ID number, a part or all of the calculation for performing a predetermined scramble process on the ID number and the calculation such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division using the ID number are performed. It is only necessary to execute and use the calculated value as the start value. When the start value is changed at each system reset, for example, the count value of the free run counter built in the main control unit 41 is set to a predetermined internal register (random number start) provided in the main control unit 41 when the system reset occurs. Value register). Then, by using the stored value of the random number start value register as it is at the time of initial setting or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function), the start value is It may be determined at random. The free-run counter only needs to be backed up using a backup power source common to the backup location on the game control board 40. Alternatively, the free-run counter may be backed up by a power source provided separately from a backup power source used for a backup area in the RAM 507 or the like. Thus, the count value in the free-run counter is stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped by backing up the free-run counter with the backup power source.

Further, in the case where two systems (corresponding to the first and second channels) for generating numerical data to be random values in the random number circuit 509 are provided, the first shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B. The bit number [3-0] of the random number initial setting KRS1 and the bit number [3-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 are used to indicate the initial setting in the first channel. On the other hand, the bit number [7-4] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 and the bit number [7-4] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 (omitted in FIGS. 8A and 8B ), the second It may be used as an indication of the initial setting in the channel.

The interrupt initial setting KIIS stored in the program management area indicates an initial setting related to handling of maskable interrupts generated in the main control unit 41. FIG. 8C shows an example of setting contents in the interrupt initial setting KIIS.

In the bit number [7-4] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, the upper 4 bits of the interrupt vector are set. In the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, a combination of priority levels of maskable interrupt factors is set. In the example shown in FIG. 8C, if any of “00H” to “02H” and “06H” is specified by the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, the maskable interrupt from the CTC 508 A combination of priorities with the factor as the highest priority is set. On the other hand, if any one of “03H” and “07H” is designated, a combination of priorities that gives the highest priority to the maskable interrupt factor from the random number circuit 509 is set. If either “04H” or “05H” is designated, a combination of priorities with the highest priority given to the maskable interrupt factor from the serial communication circuit 511 is set. If the specified value is different even if the priority is a combination of priority with the maskable interrupt factor from the same circuit as the highest priority, the type of maskable interrupt factor with the highest priority and the priority combination in the second or lower order, etc. Is different.

The security time setting KSES stored in the program management area is the frequency at which an abnormality is detected when monitoring the frequency of the random number clock RCLK, the time of the security mode in which the main control unit 41 starts operation (security time). ). Here, when the operation mode of the main control unit 41 is the security mode, a predetermined security check process is executed to check whether or not the contents stored in the ROM 506 have been changed. FIG. 9A shows an example of setting contents in the security time setting KSES.

Bit number [7-6] of security time setting KSES is a random number clock abnormality detection setting indicating a frequency at which an abnormality is detected when the frequency of random number clock RCLK is monitored. FIG. 9B shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES. The bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES specifies a reference value (determination value) at which the frequency of the random number clock RCLK is detected as abnormal based on the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK. The bit number “5” of the security time setting KSES is set to a fixed bit value “0”.

The bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES indicates a time setting when the security time is extended by a random time every system reset. FIG. 9C shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES. In the example shown in FIG. 9C, if the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is “00”, the random time extension is not performed. On the other hand, if the bit value is “01”, the short mode is set, and if the bit value is “10”, the long mode is set. Here, when the short mode or the long mode is designated, for example, the count value of the free run counter built in the main control unit 41 is changed to a predetermined built-in register (variable) included in the main control unit 41 when a system reset occurs. Store in the security time register. Then, the security time can be reduced by using the stored value of the variable security time register as it is at the initial setting or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). What is necessary is just to determine the extension time at the time of extending at random. As an example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 6.0 MHz, the extension time is randomly determined in the range of 0 to 680 μs (microseconds) in the short mode, and in the range of 0 to 348, 160 μs in the long mode. The extension time is determined at random. As another example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 10.0 MHz, the extension time is randomly determined in the range of 0 to 408 μs in the short mode, and in the range of 0 to 208,896 μs in the long mode. The extension time is determined at random. The free-run counter used for randomly determining the extension time for extending the security time for each system reset randomly determines the start value of the random number generated by the random number circuit 509 for each system reset. Therefore, the counter may be the same as the free-run counter used for this purpose, or may be a counter provided separately.

Bit number [2-0] of security time setting KSES indicates time setting when the security time is set to one of a plurality of pre-selectable extended times in addition to the fixed time. FIG. 9D shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES. In the example shown in FIG. 9D, when the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is “000”, there is no extension time added to the fixed time, and no extension is made. On the other hand, if the bit value is a value other than “000”, it is set to one of a plurality of extension times determined using the cycle T _SCLK of the internal system clock SCLK. In this case, a different extension time is set according to the designated bit value. As an example, if the bit value [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is “001” when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 6.0 MHz, about 699.1 ms in addition to the fixed time. An extension time of (milliseconds) is set. As another example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 10.0 MHz and the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is “001”, in addition to the fixed time An extension time of about 419.4 ms is set.

  Further, the short mode or the long mode is set by the bit value [4-3] of the security time setting KSES, and the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is set to other than “000”. Thus, it is possible to set an extension time to be added to the fixed time. In this case, both the extension time corresponding to the bit value in the bit number [2-0] and the extension time randomly determined based on the bit value in the bit number [4-3] are fixed times. By adding, the security time for the main control unit 41 to be in the security mode is determined.

The external bus interface 501 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 4A is an interface function between the external bus and the internal bus of the chip constituting the main control unit 41, the address bus, the data bus, and the direction of each control signal. A bus interface having a control function and the like. For example, the external bus interface 501 is connected to an external memory or an external input / output device externally attached to the main control unit 41, and transmits / receives address signals, data signals, various control signals, and the like to / from these external devices. Anything to do. In this embodiment, the external bus interface 501 includes an internal resource access control circuit 501A.

  The internal resource access control circuit 501A controls access to internal data of the main control unit 41 from an external device via the external bus interface 501, and stores internal data such as a game control program and fixed data stored in the ROM 506, for example. This is a circuit for limiting inappropriate external reading. Here, a circuit analysis device such as an in-circuit emulator (ICE) may be connected to the external bus interface 501 as an external device.

  As an example, according to the contents of the header KHDR stored in the program management area of the ROM 506, it is possible to switch between prohibiting or permitting reading of stored data in the ROM 506. For example, when the header KHDR is bus output mask invalid data, the ROM 506 can be read by an external device, and external reading of internal data is permitted. On the other hand, if the header KHDR is the bus output mask valid data, the ROM 506 can be read from the external device by masking the address bus output, data bus output and control signal output in the external bus interface 501, for example. Is disabled, and external reading of internal data is prohibited. In this case, when reading of internal data is requested from an external device connected to the external bus interface 501, a predetermined fixed value is output so that internal data cannot be read from the external device. . Further, when the header KHDR is ROM read prohibition data, the ROM 506 itself may not be read, and reading of stored data in the ROM 506 may be prevented. For example, in the ROM at the manufacturing stage, by making the header KHDR ROM read prohibition data, the ROM itself is made unreadable, and if it is a development ROM, the bus output mask invalid data is written in the header KHDR, Allows verification of internal data by an external device. On the other hand, in the case of a mass production ROM, the bus output mask valid data is written in the header KHDR so that the CPU 505 and the like can read out the ROM 506 inside the main control unit 41 while the ROM 506 by an external device. It is only necessary to prevent reading of.

  As another example, the internal resource access control circuit 501A has requested that the internal data of the main control unit 41, such as all or part of the stored data in the ROM 506, be read from an external device connected to the external bus interface 501. Is detected. When detecting this read request, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether or not to allow the main control unit 41 to read internal data. For example, it is assumed that all or part of the stored data in the ROM 506 has been encrypted. In this case, if the read request from the external device is a read request for an encryption processing program or key data stored in the ROM 506, the internal resource access control circuit 501A rejects the read request and sets the main control unit 41. Reading of internal data is prohibited. In the external bus interface 501, a switch element is provided between the output port from which data stored in the ROM 506 is output and the internal bus. When the internal resource access control circuit 501 A prohibits reading of the internal data, the switch element May be controlled to be in an off state. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A reads the internal data depending on whether or not the read request from the external device requests reading of predetermined internal data (for example, a predetermined area of the ROM 506). You may make it determine whether it prohibits or permits.

  Alternatively, the internal resource access control circuit 501A may determine whether or not a predetermined authentication code has been input from an external device when detecting a read request for internal data. In this case, for example, a predetermined code pattern serving as an authentication code may be stored in advance in the internal resource access control circuit 501A or in a predetermined area of the ROM 506. When an authentication code is input from the external device, this authentication code is compared with the internally stored authentication code. If they match, a read request is accepted and the main control unit 41 is allowed to read internal data. . On the other hand, if the authentication code input from the external device does not match the authentication code stored internally, the read request is rejected and the internal control unit 41 is prohibited from reading the internal data. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether to prohibit or permit reading of the internal data depending on whether or not the authentication code input from the external device matches the authentication code stored internally. You may make it do. As a result, it is possible to read out the internal data of the main control unit 41 using a correct authentication code obtained in advance by an inspection organization or the like, and to check the validity of the internal data appropriately. .

  As yet another example, a read prohibition flag is provided in the internal resource access control circuit 501A, and reading of the ROM 506 by an external device is prohibited if the read prohibition flag is on. On the other hand, when the reading prohibition flag is in the off state, reading of the ROM 506 by the external device is permitted. Here, the read prohibition flag is off in the initial state, but once the read prohibition flag is turned on, the read prohibition flag cannot be cleared and returned to the off state. It ’s fine. That is, the read prohibition flag can be irreversibly changed from the off state to the on state. For example, the internal resource access control circuit 501A does not have a function of clearing the read prohibition flag to turn it off, and is set so that the read prohibition flag cannot be cleared by any instruction. Just do it. Then, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether or not the read prohibition flag is on when the external device requests to read the internal data of the main control unit 41 such as the data stored in the ROM 506. At this time, if the read prohibition flag is on, the read request from the external device is rejected and the main controller 41 is prohibited from reading the internal data. On the other hand, if the read prohibition flag is off, the read request from the external device is accepted and the main controller 41 is allowed to read the internal data. With such a configuration, a provider who creates a game control program and stores it in the ROM 506 reads the program that has been debugged from the ROM 506 into an external device while the read prohibition flag is off. Can do. Then, when shipping after the debugging work is completed, by setting the read prohibition flag to the on state, external reading of the ROM 506 can be restricted thereafter, and the ROM 506 by the user of the slot machine 1 or the like can be restricted. Can be prevented from being read. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A may determine whether to prohibit or permit reading of internal data depending on whether an internal flag such as a read prohibition flag is off or on. .

  Note that the read prohibition flag is not set irreversibly but can be changed from the on state to the off state, while the read prohibition flag is changed from the on state to the off state to permit reading of internal data. In this case, the external reading of the ROM 506 may be restricted by erasing the data stored in the ROM 506 (for example, flash erasure).

  The clock circuit 502 provided in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the oscillation signal input to the control external clock terminal EXC by two. In this embodiment, the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 is input to the control external clock terminal EXC. The internal system clock SCLK generated by the clock circuit 502 is supplied to various circuits such as the CPU 505 that control the progress of the game in the main control unit 41. The internal system clock SCLK is also supplied to the random number circuit 509 and used to monitor the frequency of the random number clock RCLK supplied from the random number clock generation circuit 43. Further, the internal system clock SCLK may be output from the system clock output terminal CLKO connected to the clock circuit 502 to the outside of the main control unit 41. It is desirable that the internal system clock SCLK is not output to the outside of the main control unit 41. As described above, by limiting the external output of the internal system clock SCLK, it becomes difficult to specify the operation cycle of the internal circuit (such as the CPU 505) of the main control unit 41 from the outside. In the case of updating by this, it is possible to prevent the random number update cycle from being specified externally.

  The unique information storage circuit 503 included in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information serving as internal information of the main control unit 41, for example. As an example, the unique information storage circuit 503 stores three types of unique information such as a ROM code, a chip individual number, and an ID number. The ROM 506 code is a 4-byte numerical value generated from stored data in a predetermined area of the ROM 506, and four numerical values with different generation methods may be prepared. The chip individual number is a 4-byte number assigned when the main control unit 41 is manufactured, and indicates a different numerical value for each chip constituting the main control unit 41. The ID number is an 8-byte number assigned when the main control unit 41 is manufactured, and indicates a different numerical value for each chip constituting the main control unit 41. Here, it is sufficient that the chip individual number can be read from the user program while the ID number cannot be read from the user program. The unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the ROM 506 by using a predetermined area of the ROM 506, for example. Alternatively, the unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the CPU 505 by using a built-in register of the CPU 505, for example.

  The reset / interrupt controller 504 provided in the main control unit 41 is for controlling various resets and interrupt requests generated inside or outside the main control unit 41. The reset controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 includes a system reset and a user reset. The system reset is a reset that occurs when a low level signal (system reset signal) is input to the external system reset terminal XSRST for a certain period. The user reset is performed when a low level signal (user reset signal) is input to the external user reset terminal XURST for a certain period of time, or when a time-out signal of the built-in watchdog timer (WDT) is generated, or when running outside the specified area This reset is caused by a predetermined factor such as the occurrence of prohibition (IAT). In this embodiment, as described above, since the watchdog timer (WDT) mounted on the reset circuit 49 is used without using the built-in watchdog timer, a user reset signal is input to the external user reset terminal XURST. Alternatively, a user reset occurs when the out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) occurs.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, a reset circuit 49 incorporating a watchdog timer 49a is mounted on the game control board 40. The reset circuit 49 outputs a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 until the power supplied to the slot machine 1 becomes a stable voltage and a predetermined time has elapsed. When the watchdog timer 49a times out, a user reset signal is output to the main control unit 41.

As shown in FIG. 4B , in the game control board 40, among the signal lines connected from the LED drive circuit 47 to the credit indicator 11, the lower one of the drive signals of the plurality of segments constituting the credit indicator 11. The signal line of the 1 digit B segment signal, the lower 1 digit C segment signal, the upper 1 digit B segment signal, and the upper 1 digit C segment signal is branched and connected to the watchdog timer clear signal terminal of the reset circuit 49 via the or circuit. Has been.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls to dynamically light any one of the lower 1 digit B segment, the lower 1 digit C segment, the upper 1 digit B segment, and the upper 1 digit C segment of the credit indicator 11. In order to dynamically light these segments, if the main control unit 41 is operating normally, one of the drive signals of these four segments should be output periodically. It is possible to determine whether or not the main control unit 41 is operating normally by monitoring whether or not the drive signal of any one of the segments is periodically output.

  A signal obtained by combining the drive signals of these four segments through the or circuit is input to the watchdog timer clear signal terminal of the reset circuit 49, and the watchdog timer 49a is cleared. The output of the drive signals of the four segments is stopped, the watchdog timer 49a is not cleared, and the user reset signal is output to the main control unit 41 when time is up.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the segment signal of the LED to which the drive signal is given periodically is branched to clear the watchdog timer 49a, and the CPU 505 of the main control unit 41 individually monitors the watchdog timer 49a. This is preferable because it is possible to monitor whether or not the main control unit 41 is operating normally without performing the process of clearing the watchdog timer, but the watchdog timer clear signal terminal of the reset circuit 49 from the main control unit 41 The watchdog timer 49a may be cleared by inputting an individual clear signal.

  In the present embodiment, the watchdog timer 49a is mounted on the reset circuit 49 provided outside the main control unit 41, but the main control unit is used by using the watchdog timer built in the main control unit 41. The operation of 41 may be monitored.

  Interrupts controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 include a non-maskable interrupt NMI and a maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that is unconditionally accepted even when the CPU 505 is in an interrupt-disabled state. When a low level signal is input to the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (also used as the input port P4) for a certain period of time. An interrupt that occurs. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt that can permit / prohibit acceptance of an interrupt request by a setting instruction of the CPU 505, and multiple interrupts can be executed by setting priority. The maskable interrupt INT is caused by the fact that a low level signal has been input to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (also used as the input port P3) for a certain period of time, a time-out has occurred in the timer circuit included in the CTC 508, Multiple types of interrupt factors are determined in advance, such as the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to data transmission in the serial communication circuit 511 and the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to the acquisition of numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509. It only has to be done.

The reset / interrupt controller 504 includes an interrupt mask register IMR (address 2028H), an interrupt wait monitor register IRR (address 2029H), an interrupt among the built-in registers included in the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. Interrupt control and reset management are performed using the monitor monitor register ISR (address 202AH) and the internal information register CIF (address 208CH). The interrupt mask register IMR is a register that sets what is used and what is not used among maskable interrupts INT caused by a plurality of different factors. The interrupt wait monitor register IRR is a register for confirming the generation state of a maskable interrupt request signal for each maskable interrupt factor set by the interrupt initial setting KIIS. The interrupt monitor register ISR is a register for confirming the processing state of the maskable interrupt request signal for each maskable interrupt factor set by the interrupt initial setting KIIS. The internal information register CIF is a register for managing the reset factor generated immediately before and recording the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK.

FIG. 10A shows a configuration example of the internal information register CIF. FIG. 10B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the internal information data stored in the internal information register CIF. The internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is a random number clock abnormality instruction indicating the presence or absence of a frequency abnormality in the random number clock RCLK. In the example shown in FIG. 10B, when the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 becomes “0”, while when the frequency abnormality is detected, the bit value is “1”. The internal information data CIF2 stored in the bit number [2] of the internal information register CIF is a system reset instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 10B , when the immediately preceding reset factor is not a system reset (system reset has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data CIF2 is “0”, whereas when the system reset is a system reset (system reset) When the reset occurs), the bit value becomes “1”.

The internal information data CIF1 stored in the bit number [1] of the internal information register CIF is a WDT timeout instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to a watchdog timer (WDT) timeout. . In the example shown in FIG. 10B , when the previous reset factor is not a user reset due to a watchdog timer timeout (timeout has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data CIF1 becomes “0”, while the watchdog When a user reset is caused by a timer timeout (timeout occurs), the bit value becomes “1”. The internal information data CIF0 stored in the bit number [0] of the internal information register CIF is an IAT generation instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to prohibition of travel outside the designated area (IAT). . In the example shown in FIG. 10B , when the reset factor immediately before is not a user reset due to the occurrence of travel outside the designated area (no IAT occurrence), the bit value of the internal information data CIF0 becomes “0”, while When the user reset is caused by the occurrence of out-of-area travel (the occurrence of IAT), the bit value becomes “1”.

  The CPU 505 provided in the main control unit 41 executes processing for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 by executing the program read from the ROM 506. At this time, the CPU 505 reads out fixed data from the ROM 506, the CPU 505 writes various data to the RAM 507 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 505 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 507. The CPU 505 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501 or the PIP 510, and the CPU 505 receives the input of various signals via the external bus interface 501 or the serial communication circuit 511. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 is also performed.

  As described above, in the main control unit 41, the CPU 505 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 506. Therefore, the main control unit 41 (or CPU 505) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 505 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the game control board 40.

  A ROM 506 provided in the main control unit 41 stores a user program for game control, fixed data, and the like. The ROM 506 stores a security check program 506A. The CPU 505 reads the security check program 506A stored in the ROM 506 when the main control unit 41 shifts to the security mode in response to the power-on of the slot machine 1 or the occurrence of a system reset, and whether the storage content of the ROM 506 has been changed. Execute security check processing to check whether or not. The security check program 506A may be stored in a built-in memory different from the ROM 506. Further, the security check program 506A may correspond to a security check process for inspecting the storage content of the external memory externally attached to the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, for example.

  A RAM 507 provided in the main control unit 41 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 507 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, at least part of the contents of the RAM 507 is stored for a predetermined period. In this embodiment, all areas of the RAM 507 are backup RAMs, and all contents of the RAM 507 are saved for a predetermined period even when power supply to the slot machine is stopped.

  The CTC 508 provided in the main control unit 41 includes, for example, an 8-bit programmable timer built in 3 channels (PTC0 to PTC2), and includes a timer circuit capable of generating a real-time interrupt and measuring time. Each programmable timer PTC0-PTC2 has a timer value that is updated in response to a change in the count clock signal generated based on the internal system clock SCLK (for example, a falling timing that changes from a high level to a low level). If it is good. In addition, the CTC 508 may incorporate, for example, an 8-bit programmable counter with 4 channels (PCC0 to PCC3). Each of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3 is only required to have its count value updated in response to a signal change of the internal system clock SCLK or occurrence of a timeout in any of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3. The CTC 508 resets the start time of the random number generated by the free run counter used for randomly determining the extension time (variable setting time) for extending the security time for each system reset or the random number circuit 509. A free-run counter or the like that is used to randomly determine each time may be included. Alternatively, these free-run counters may be included in an internal circuit of the main control unit 41 different from the CTC 508 such as a backup area of the RAM 507, for example.

  A random number circuit 509 included in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that generates numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as a 16-bit random number. In the present embodiment, on the game control board 40 side, numerical data indicating a random value for internal lottery to be described later is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The CPU 505 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 509 based on the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 to process or update various numerical data by software, thereby indicating numerical data indicating a random value for internal lottery. May be counted. In the following, it is assumed that numerical data indicating random numbers for internal lottery is not processed by software from numerical data extracted by the CPU 505 from the random number circuit 509 serving as hardware. The random number circuit 509 may be incorporated in the main control unit 41 or may be externally attached to the main control unit 41 as a random number circuit chip different from the main control unit 41. .

  The random number for internal lottery is a value used to determine whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings, and takes a value in the range of “0” to “65535” in this embodiment.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number circuit 509. As shown in FIG. 11 , the random number circuit 509 includes a frequency monitoring circuit 551, a clock flip-flop 552, a random number generation circuit 553, a start value setting circuit 554, a random number sequence change circuit 555, a random number sequence change setting circuit 556, and a latch flip-flop. 557A, 557B, random number latch selectors 558A, 558B, and random number value registers 559A, 559B. The random value register 559A and the random value register 559B are respectively a random value register R1D (address 2038H-2039H) and a random value register R2D (address) included in the built-in register of the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 203AH-203BH). In this embodiment, the random numbers to be acquired are only random numbers for internal lottery, and among the latch flip-flops 557A, 557B, the random number latch selectors 558A, 558B, and the random number registers 559A, 559B, the latch flip-flop 557B, The random number latch selector 558B and the random number value register 559B are unused.

The frequency monitoring circuit 551 is a circuit for monitoring the frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generating circuit 43 and detecting the occurrence of an abnormality. For example, the frequency monitoring circuit 551 monitors the oscillation signal input to the random number external clock terminal ERC, and sets the contents of the bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES based on the internal system clock SCLK ( FIG. 9 (B When the frequency abnormality according to the reference) is detected, the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is set to “1”. In this embodiment, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 is input to the random number external clock terminal ERC.

  The clock flip-flop 552 is configured using, for example, a D-type flip-flop, and the random number clock RCLK from the random number external clock terminal ERC is input to the clock terminal CK. Further, in the clock flip-flop 552, the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar is connected to the D input terminal. The random number update clock RGK is output from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q, while the latch clock RC0 is output from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar. In this case, when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK input to the clock terminal CK changes a predetermined state, the clock flip-flop 552 has a positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q and a negative phase output terminal ( Inverted output terminal) Changes the signal state in the output signal from the Q bar. For example, the clock flip-flop 552 has a rising timing at which the signal state of the random number clock RCLK changes from a low level to a high level, or a rising edge at which the signal state of the random number clock RCLK changes from a high level to a low level. The input signal at the D input terminal is captured at any one of the falling timings. At this time, from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q, the input signal captured at the D input terminal is output without being inverted, while the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar is output. From the input signal captured by the D input terminal is inverted and output. Thus, the random number update clock RGK having an oscillation frequency (for example, 10 MHz) that is ½ of the oscillation frequency (for example, 20 MHz) of the random number clock RCLK from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q of the clock flip-flop 552. Is output from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar, that is, the reverse phase signal (inverted signal) of the random number update clock RGK, that is, the same frequency as the random number update clock RGK and the phase of the random number update clock RGK is π. A different latch clock RC0 is output by (= 180 °).

  The random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552 is input to the clock terminal of the random number generation circuit 553 and used for incrementing the count value in the random number generation circuit 553. The latch clock RC0 output from the clock flip-flop 552 is branched into the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 at the branch point BR1. Therefore, the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 have the same oscillation frequency, and the signal state changes with a common cycle. Here, changes in the signal state in the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 include, for example, a rise that changes from a low level to a high level and a fall that changes from a high level to a low level. The latch clock RC1 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557A and becomes a random number acquisition clock used to generate the latch signal SL1 at the start of the game.

  The oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK and the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 are different from each other, and one of the oscillation frequencies is the other oscillation frequency. It is never an integer multiple of. As an example, while the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK is 11.0 MHz, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK may be 9.7 MHz. Therefore, both the random number update clock RGK and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 are oscillation signals whose signal states change at a different period from the control clock CCLK supplied to the CPU 505. In other words, the clock flip-flop 552 is based on the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43, and the random number update clock RGK for updating the count value, and the latch clock used as a plurality of random number acquisition clocks. As RC1 and RC2, oscillation signals whose signal states change with a period different from the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK (the control clock CCLK divided by two) are generated.

  The random number generation circuit 553 is composed of, for example, a 16-bit counter and the like, and based on an input such as a random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552, a predetermined initial value within a predetermined range in which numerical data can be updated. It is a circuit that cyclically updates to a predetermined final value. For example, the random number generation circuit 553 responds to the rising edge of the random number update clock RGK, which is an input signal to a predetermined clock terminal, from the initial value set in the range from “0” to “65535” to “65535”. The numerical data is counted up so that one is added at a time. Then, after counting up to “65535”, the numerical data is updated cyclically by counting up from “0” to a numerical value that becomes a final value that is 1 smaller than the initial value.

The start value setting circuit 554 sets the start value in the count value generated by the random number generation circuit 553 in accordance with the bit value (see FIG. 8B ) in the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 . Set. For example, the start value setting circuit 554 sets the start value to the default value “0000H” if the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “00”, and if it is “10”. The value is set based on the ID number. If “01”, the value is changed every time the system is reset. In this embodiment, the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “10”, and a value based on the ID number is set as the start value in the count value generated by the random number generation circuit 553. Is done.

  The random number sequence change circuit 555 is a circuit that allows the permutation, which is the update order of the numerical data, to be changed to a permutation that conforms to a predetermined random number update rule when the numerical data generated by the random number generation circuit 553 makes a round. For example, the random number sequence change circuit 555 executes bit scramble processing such as bit replacement or transposition in numerical data output from the random number generation circuit 553. The random number sequence change circuit 555 can change the permutation, which is the update order of the numerical data, by changing the bit scramble key or the bit scramble table used for the bit scramble process, for example.

The random number sequence change setting circuit 556 determines the update order of numerical data in the random number sequence change circuit 555 according to the bit value (see FIG. 8A ) in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 . It is a circuit for performing the setting to change. For example, if the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “00”, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 sets the random number update rule not to change after the second round, while “01” If so, the random number update rule is changed in response to a change request by software after the second round, and if it is “10”, the random number update rule is automatically changed. In the present embodiment, the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “10”, and the random number update rule is automatically changed.

The random number sequence change setting circuit 556 changes the random number update rule by software in response to the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being “01” . The random number update rule is controlled using the random number sequence change register RDSC (address 2034H) among the built-in registers included in the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. FIG. 12A shows a configuration example of the random number sequence change register RDSC. FIG. 12B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number sequence change request data stored in the random number sequence change register RDSC. The random number sequence change request data RDSC0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC indicates the presence / absence of a random number sequence change request when the random number update rule is changed by software. In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when there is no random number sequence change request by software, the bit value of the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 is “0”, while when there is a random number sequence change request, The bit value is “1”.

FIG. 13 shows an operation example when the random number update rule is changed by software. In this case, when the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 is cyclically updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, the response is that the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 is “1”. Then, change the random number update rule. In the operation example illustrated in FIG. 13 , the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “0 → 1 →... → 65535”. Thereafter, it is assumed that “1” is written to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC at a predetermined timing by the CPU 505 executing the user program stored in the ROM 506.

In response to the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being “01”, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 reads the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 and the bit value is “1”. In response to "," a setting for changing the random number update rule is made. At this time, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556, according to the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 reaching a predetermined final value, for example, any one of a plurality of types of random number update rules prepared in advance. The random number update rule is changed, for example, by selecting. In the operation example shown in FIG. 13 , the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs numerical data “65535” corresponding to the final value in the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553, and then responds to the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Change the random number update rule. Thereafter, the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs “65535 → 65534 →... → 0” as the random number sequence RSN according to the changed random number update rule. The random number sequence change register RDSC is initialized when the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 reads the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Therefore, until the bit value “1” is written to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC again, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “65535 → 65534 →... → 0”. Become.

When the CPU 505 writes the bit value “1” again to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC, the random number update rule is changed again. In the operation example shown in FIG. 13 , when the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs numerical data “0” corresponding to the final value in the random number sequence RSN, the bit value “1” is written as the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Change the random number update rule accordingly. Thereafter, the random number sequence changing circuit 555 outputs “0 → 2 →... → 65534 → 1 →... → 65535” as the random number sequence RSN according to the changed random number update rule.

FIG. 14 shows an operation example when the random number update rule is automatically changed. In this case, in response to the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 being cyclically updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 automatically changes the random number update rule. To change. In the operation example shown in FIG. 14 , the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “0 → 1 →... → 65535”.

When the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 reaches a predetermined final value, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 has a predetermined order from among a plurality of types of update rules prepared in advance. The update rule may be changed by selecting the update rule according to the above. Alternatively, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 may change the update rule by selecting an arbitrary update rule from among a plurality of types of update rules. In the operation example shown in FIG. 14 , the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “65535 → 65534 →. Thereafter, due to the second change in the random number update rule, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “0 → 2 →... → 65534 → 1 →. In the operation example illustrated in FIG. 14 , the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “65534 → 0 →... → 32768” due to the third change in the random number update rule. When the fourth random number update rule change is performed, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “16383 → 49151 →... → 49150”. When the fifth random number update rule change is performed, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “4 → 3 →... → 465553”.

  The latch flip-flop 557A is configured using, for example, a D-type flip-flop. In the latch flip-flop 557A, a wiring from the input port P0 included in the PIP 510 is connected to the D input terminal, and a wiring for transmitting the latch clock RC1 is connected to the clock terminal CK. In this embodiment, the game start signal SS1 from the start switch 7 is input to the input port P0. The latch flip-flop 557A takes in the game start signal SS1 in response to the rising edge of the latch clock RC1, and outputs it as the game start latch signal SL1. Thus, in the latch flip-flop 557A, the game start signal SS1 is output as the game start latch signal SL1 in synchronization with the rising edge of the latch clock RC1.

  The game start signal SS1 is not limited to that transmitted directly from the start switch 7. As an example, a timer circuit is provided that measures the time during which the output signal from the start switch 7 is on and outputs a game start signal SS1 when the measured time reaches a predetermined time (eg, 3 ms). May be.

The random number latch selector 558A is a circuit that takes in the game start latch signal SL1 transmitted from the latch flip-flop 557A and the software random number latch request signal, and selectively outputs either one as the random number latch signal LL1. Random latch selector 558A, among the internal register included in the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 6 (B), by using a random number acquisition register RDLT (address 2032H), controls the output of the random number latch signal LL1. The random value acquisition register RDLT is a register used to acquire numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 into the random value register 559A by software. The random number latch selection register RDLS has a method of taking in the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence changing circuit 555 into the random value register 559A by software or by inputting a signal to the input port P0. It is a register to show.

FIG. 15A shows a configuration example of the random value fetch register RDLT. FIG. 15B shows an example of the setting contents in each bit of the random number acquisition specification data stored in the random value acquisition register RDLT. The random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random value acquisition register RDLT indicates whether or not a random value acquisition specification is given to the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 15 (B), when the random number value acquisition specification for the random value register R1D is not specified by software, the bit value of the random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 is “0”, while the random value acquisition is not performed. The bit value is “1” when an instruction is included.

FIG. 16A shows a configuration example of the random number latch selection register RDLS. FIG. 16B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the random number latch selection data stored in the random number latch selection register RDLS. The random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS indicates a method of taking in the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 16B, when numerical data that becomes a random number value is fetched into the random value register R1D in response to the writing of the random value fetch designation data RDLT0 by software, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is set to “ 0 ”. On the other hand, when the numerical value data to be a random number value is taken into the random value register R1D in response to the signal input to the input port P0, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is set to “1”. In this embodiment, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is “1”, and numerical data that becomes a random number value is taken into the random value register R1D in response to a signal input to the input port P0.

The random value register 559A is a register that stores numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 as a random value. FIGS. 17A and 17B show a configuration example of a random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D. Incidentally, FIG. 17 (A) shows a lower byte R1D random number register R1D (L), FIG. 17 (B) is shows the upper byte R1D (H) of the random number register R1D. The random value register 559A is a 16-bit (2-byte) register, and can store a 16-bit random value.

  The random value register 559A takes in the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 as a random value in response to the random number latch signal LL1 supplied from the random number latch selector 558A being turned on. Store with. When the register read signal RRS1 supplied from the CPU 505 is turned on, the random value register 559A is in a readable (enable) state and outputs stored numerical data to an internal bus or the like. On the other hand, when the register read signal RRS1 is in the off state, the same value (for example, “65535H” or the like) is always output, and the reading is disabled (disabled). Further, the random value register 559A may be in a state in which the register read signal RRS1 cannot be received when the random number latch signal LL1 is in the ON state. Further, the random number register 559A may be configured to be in a state in which the random number latch signal LL1 cannot be received when the register read signal RRS1 is in the on state before the random number latch signal LL1 is in the on state. good.

The random value register 559A uses a random number latch flag register RDFM (address 2033H) and a random number interrupt control register RDIC (address 2031H) among the built-in registers provided in the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 6B. This enables operation management and interrupt control when latching random numbers. The random number latch flag register RDFM is a register that stores a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data serving as a random number value has been latched corresponding to the random value register 559A. The random number interrupt control register RDIC is a register that sets permission / prohibition of an interrupt that occurs when numerical data that becomes a random value is latched in the random number value register 559A.

FIG. 18A shows a configuration example of the random number latch flag register RDFM. FIG. 18B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number latch flag data stored in the random number latch flag register RDFM. The random number latch flag data RDFM0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch flag register RDFM is a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data has been taken into the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 18B, when the numerical value data is not taken into the random value register R1D (no random value is taken), the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 becomes “0”, while the numerical data Is taken (with random number fetching), the bit value becomes “1”. In the state where the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “1”, that is, in the state where the numerical data is captured in the random value register R1D, the new numerical data is stored in the random value register even when a new random number capturing request is generated. In such a state, the numerical data in the random value register R1D is read and new numerical data is captured in the random value register R1D until the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is cleared. It becomes impossible.

FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of the random number interrupt control register RDIC. FIG. 19B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number interrupt control data stored in the random number interrupt control register RDIC. The random number interrupt control data RDIC0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number interrupt control register RDIC permits an interrupt that occurs when numerical data is fetched into the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. This shows the interrupt control setting to enable or disable. In the example shown in FIG. 19B, when interrupting at the time of fetching to the random value register R1D is prohibited (interrupt prohibited), the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC0 is set to “0”. When this interrupt is permitted (interrupt permitted), the bit value is set to “1”. In the present embodiment, the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC0 is set to “0”, and no interrupt is generated even if numerical data is fetched into the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D.

  The PIP 510 included in the main control unit 41 is, for example, a 6-bit input dedicated port, and includes an input port P0 to an input port P2 serving as a dedicated terminal and an input port P3 serving as a function shared terminal and an input port P5. . The input port P3 is also used as an external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P4 is also used as an external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P5 is also used as the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511. The use setting of the input port P3 to the input port P5 is instructed by the function setting KFCS stored in the program management area.

The PIP 510 manages the state of the input port P0 to the input port P5 using the input port register PI (address 2090H) among the built-in registers included in the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG . The input port register PI is a register that stores a bit value indicating the input state of the external signal corresponding to each of the input port P0 to the input port P5.

FIG. 20A shows a configuration example of the input port register PI. FIG. 20B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the input port data stored in the input port register PI. The input port data PI5 stored in the bit number [5] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P5 that is also used as the first channel receiving terminal RXA. The input port data PI4 stored in the bit number [4] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P4 that is also used as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. The input port data PI3 stored in the bit number [3] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P3 that is also used as the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT. The input port data PI2 stored in the bit number [2] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P2. The input port data PI1 stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P1. The input port data PI0 stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P0.

An address decoding circuit 512 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 4 is a circuit for decoding each functional block in the main control unit 41 and a chip select signal that is a decoding signal for an external device. . By the chip select signal, an internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or an external device as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively and can be accessed from the CPU 505.

  The ROM 506 provided in the main control unit 41 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control user program and the security check program 506A. For example, the ROM 506 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 505 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 506 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 505 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the game control board 40.

  The RAM 507 provided in the main control unit 41 is provided with a game control data holding area 590 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. For example, a DRAM is used as the RAM 507, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 505 has a built-in refresh register for performing this refresh operation. For example, the refresh register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented each time the CPU 505 fetches an instruction from the ROM 506. Accordingly, the stored value in the refresh register is updated every execution time of one instruction in the CPU 505.

  The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the serial communication circuit 511. A command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the sub control unit 91 toward the main control unit 41.

As shown in FIG. 21 , the serial communication circuit 511 includes a data register 560, a transmission data register 561, a transmission shift register 562, and a status register 563.

  The data register 560 is a register for temporarily buffering command data generated by the CPU 505 and transferred via the internal bus. The command data buffered in the data register 560 is stored in an empty area of the transmission data register 561. The

  The transmission data register 561 is a register that stores command data waiting for transmission. The transmission data register 561 is provided with an area capable of storing a plurality of command data, and can store a maximum of 32 bytes of command data.

  The transmission shift register 562 is a register for storing command data converted into serial data. The command data stored at the earliest stage among the command data stored in the transmission data register 561 is converted into serial data. And stored in the transmission shift register 562. When the command data is stored in the transmission shift register 562, the command data is immediately transferred to the sub-control unit 91.

  The status register 563 stores data indicating the transmission state of the serial communication circuit 511, such as transmission completion indicating whether or not command data is being transmitted, and data empty indicating whether or not command data is stored in the transmission data register 561. Register. When “1” is stored as the value of transmission completion, it indicates that the command data has not been transmitted or the transmission of command data has been completed, and when “0” is stored, Indicates that command data is being transmitted or is waiting for command data transmission. When “1” is set as the data empty value, it indicates that one or more command data waiting for transmission is stored in the transmission data register 561, and when “0” is stored. The transmission data register 561 indicates that command data waiting for transmission is not stored.

  The value of the status register 563 can be referred to by the CPU 505 via the internal bus, and the CPU 505 can check the transmission state of the serial communication circuit 511 by reading the value of the status register 563.

Next, the operation status of the serial communication circuit 511 will be described with reference to FIG .

First, when all the areas of the transmission data register 561 are in an empty state and command data is not transmitted by the transmission shift register 562, as shown in FIG. Both empty values are set to “1”.

As shown in FIG. 22B , when the command data 1 and 2 are stored in the transmission data register 561 according to the transfer instruction of the CPU 505, both the transmission completion and data empty values change to “0”.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 22C and 22D, the command data 1 stored first among the command data 1 and 2 stored in the transmission data register 561 is converted into serial data, and the transmission shift register 562 is converted. When the transmission of the command data 1 is completed, the next stored command data 2 is converted into serial data and transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by the transmission shift register 562. At the same time, the last command data is converted into serial data and stored in the transmission shift register 562. When the transmission data register 561 becomes empty, the value of the data empty changes to “1”, as shown in FIG. Thus, when the transmission of the last command data stored in the transmission shift register 562 is also completed, Changes to a value to "1" of signal completion, a state in which transmission is completed for all the command data.

  The main control unit 41 receives the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the input port. Then, the main control unit 41 executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection states of various switches input from these input ports.

  Further, the main control unit 41 can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (main), which will be described later, is executed at a certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment) when a timeout occurs in the timer circuit included in the CTC 508.

  The main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, the main control unit 41 prioritizes according to a predetermined order. An interrupt to be executed is set. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process is completed, a new interrupt will occur at that point. It will be.

  The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as a basic process, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Execute a process that moves in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). In addition, the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repeated process according to the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to effect devices such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), an effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above, which are arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These effect devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55. However, in addition to the sub-control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output control unit may determine the output pattern of the effect device, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be performed. The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the units.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, for example, a mechanically driven display. A device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the effect device.

  The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer including a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, I / O port 91d, etc., and a liquid crystal display connected to the sub control unit 91 for effect control and the effect control board 90. Display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the device 51, LED drive circuit 93 for performing drive control of the effect LED 52 and reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, at power-on or power-off A reset circuit 95 that sometimes gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a, a clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and a power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 are monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, A power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub-control unit 91 is mounted. In response to the command transmitted from the main control unit, the sub-control unit 91 performs various controls for performing an effect, and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. Control.

  The reset circuit 95 has a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. When the power is turned on, the sub control unit 91 It starts at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power interruption detection circuit 98 has a voltage that outputs a voltage drop signal lower than the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. The sub control unit 91 detects a power failure at a later stage than the main control unit 41, and performs a power interruption process (sub) described later.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Execute command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 executes an interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, by generating an interrupt every time the number of input system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval.

  Also, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process even when the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when an interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 23 , these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the CPU 505 of the main control unit 41, and provide information on the game store (hall) where the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. The signal is output to a hall device such as a hall computer via a terminal board 1010.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state RB signal indicating that RB is described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating that the medals are in error, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality in the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality in the hopper unit 34 are output.

  In this embodiment, there is no challenge time (a gaming state in which the number of sliding pieces on the reel is limited, but winning is allowed for all small roles) or a challenge bonus with a high probability of challenge time. However, in order to make common with the slot machines equipped with these gaming states, in addition to the signal lines for outputting the above signals, the gaming state is a challenge between the gaming control board 40 and the external output board 1000. A signal line for outputting a CT signal indicating that the time is in progress and a CB signal indicating that the gaming state is in the challenge bonus is connected, and a signal line for error output that may be expanded in the future is connected. Has been.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) are directly used as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. The information is output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. . On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal and setting among these external output signals are set. The change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000, and output to the outside. Thus, it is possible to output the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the making error signal, and the paying error signal are serially identifiable by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a signal, and output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a paying error signal is output by an AND circuit or the like. In such a case, an error signal may be output to the outside through a single terminal. Even in this case, either an error has occurred in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the terminal is being generated, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 507 is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the display returns to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 507 is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected every time the timer interruption process (main) is executed. If the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, the power interruption process (main) is executed. In the power interruption process (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 507, which will be described later. In addition to the storage, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 becomes 0 and stored in the RAM 507. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of the values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 507. For this reason, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main control unit 41 calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 at the time of activation, regardless of whether the system reset or the user reset, and the value of the data for destructive diagnosis And the processing state of the main control unit 41 is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 507 on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the value of the data for destruction diagnosis is also correct. However, if the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or the value of the destruction diagnosis data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state. However, the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the normal error state, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the above-described setting change state. It will not be released until

  In this embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 507 is held by the backup power source even in the event of a power failure, and the main control unit 41 determines that the data in the RAM 507 is normal when the power is turned on. In addition, the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 507. However, only the data stored in the RAM 507 that is necessary for returning to the control state in the event of a power failure is backed up and the power is turned on. It may be configured to return to the control state before power interruption based on the data backed up at the time.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore the state of all input ports to the state before power interruption.

  The sub control unit 91 also determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 is detected in the timer interrupt process (sub), and if it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected, Disconnection processing (sub) is executed. In the power interruption process (sub), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 91c, which will be described later, and destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored in the RAM 91c, and also based on data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and sets the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. Based on this, the processing state of the sub-control unit 91 is restored to the state before the power interruption, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM 91c is initialized. . In this case, unlike the main control unit 41, only the RAM 91c is initialized, and the performance is not disabled.

  In this embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 91c is held by the backup power supply even in the event of a power failure, and the sub-control unit 91 determines that the data in the RAM 91c is normal when the power is turned on. In addition, the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c, but only the data required to return to the control state during a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 91c and the power is turned on. It may be configured to return to the control state before power interruption based on the data backed up at the time.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player It is not necessary to restore the state of the input port or the progress in the middle of the production when it is interrupted.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a non-saved work, a non-initialized area, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data which is inconvenient if it is initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices, LED display data, I / O input / output data, and game time counter. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the BB. The special work is a work that stores data such as various software random numbers that are initialized only before the setting is started. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 507 is destroyed at the time of activation. The uninitialized work is a work that stores data that is not initialized even when a RAM error or setting is changed. The non-initialized work further includes a set value work for storing a set value used when a lottery is performed in the internal lottery process, and a command buffer (in the command buffer) in which a command transmitted to the effect control board 90 is temporarily stored. This command is maintained until the next command is stored, so the last transmitted command is always stored), so that the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, and RB output to the external output board 1000 are stored. Of the medium signal, BB signal, door open signal, setting change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal, the door open signal, setting change signal, input error signal, and payout constituting the security signal output from the external output board 1000 A security work for storing the output state (on / off state) of the error signal is assigned. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 507, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main control unit 41 is stored, and the unused stack area is one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, if it is established, it will be initialized, but the in-use stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 stores the data in the RAM 507 when the setting key switch 37 is turned on, when a RAM error occurs, when the BB ends, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned off. When not being destroyed, when five initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, four types of initializations that are initialized in accordance with each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and transitions to a setting change state, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the storage area of the RAM 507, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the used stack area and the non-initialized area are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 507. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an off state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 507 is not destroyed. In the initialization 3, the unsaved work, the unused area, and the The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 507 are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 is performed before the change of the setting change state. However, the initialization 1 is performed at the end of the setting change state, or both before the change of the setting change state and at the end of the setting change state. Also good.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a RAM abnormality error occurs at the time of power-on or the like, initialization 1 is executed and the control state before that is initialized. The data stored in the command buffer, setting value work, and security work allocated to the data area is not initialized but is retained. At this time, the command buffer has the command sent last when the RAM abnormality error occurred, the set value work has the set value when the RAM abnormal error occurs, and the security work has the door when the RAM abnormal error occurs. Since the output status of the release signal, setting change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal is held in a stored state, whether any error command is transmitted from these data when a RAM error occurs, It is possible to specify whether the value has not been changed, the output state of the door open signal, setting change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal, and the cause of the RAM abnormality can be specified Furthermore, it is possible to identify the possibility that some kind of fraud has been performed.

  Furthermore, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality error, the uninitialized area is not initialized even if the setting value is changed, and the stored data in the uninitialized area is intentionally initialized. Since it is impossible, even if a RAM abnormality error occurs due to fraud, the stored data of the command buffer, setting value work, and security work can be left as a trace.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In the present embodiment, all the winning lines L1 to L4 are activated when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state are set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line). When a combination of symbols called a combination is arranged on the winning line, a winning is achieved. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition to a game state advantageous to the player. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the game state, it is necessary to win an internal lottery described later and set a winning flag for the winning combination in the RAM 507.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combination permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random value for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value of the random number storage work assigned to the RAM 507 is set to the lottery work assigned to the RAM 507. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, numerical data stored in the lottery work, and determination of each combination determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value This is done according to the number of values.

  The random value storage work is a storage area for storing numerical data latched in the random value register R1D simultaneously with the operation of the start switch 7, and is latched every time new numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D. The numerical data is read in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main), and the numerical data stored in the random value storage work is updated to the latest latched numerical data.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined in accordance with the internal lottery target, the current gaming state, and the set value are sequentially assigned to the random number for internal lottery (numerical data stored in the lottery work). When the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  If a winning combination of any combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 507. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a storage area of 2 bytes, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work for which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The main control unit 41 refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 506 when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. A stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even when the winning combinations are different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (the number of steps that one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stop control table address of the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main control unit 41 effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel is described. To explain, when any operation corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the non-winning winning combination is drawn so that it is not aligned on the winning line. A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created and reel stop control is performed. If no winning combination is selected, a stop control table with a determined number of sliding symbols that do not have any combination And stop control of the reel. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination that has not been performed will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, such as when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the winning small role is the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line. The number of sliding frames is fixed so that it can be drawn to the limit, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames in the winning line, the winning special role is in the range of 4 frames in the winning line Then, a stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, A control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within a 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn in, and the small combination is not aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  In this example, when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when a special role and a small role are simultaneously elected, the special role and the small role are won simultaneously. If the selected special role is given priority over the selected special role, the special role is controlled on the winning line only when the small role cannot be withdrawn. When winning simultaneously, priority is given to the control for aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and the control for aligning the small role on the winning line may be performed only when the special role cannot be drawn.

  If a special player and a replaying player are elected at the same time, such as when a replaying player is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, when the stop operation is performed, In addition, a control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped within a drawing range of up to 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gamer or the symbols constituting the re-gamer to be simultaneously elected are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, that is, within 4 frames, for any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected at the same time, the timing of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Without fail, the re-playing role will always be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the main control unit 41 rotates the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected yet until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Continuously, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

Next, various control contents by the main control unit 41 in this embodiment is executed will be described below with reference to FIGS. 24 through 43.

When the system reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the main control unit 41 performs the startup process (main) shown in the flowchart of FIG . When a user reset signal is input, the process starts from the step Sa2 of the startup process (main). That is, while starting from the security mode in which the security check process is performed only in the case of activation upon power-on, the user program stored in the ROM 506 is executed by omitting the security check process in the case of activation due to the time-up of the watchdog timer 49a. It starts from the user mode to execute.

In the startup process (main) accompanying the input of the system reset signal, first, the CPU 505 executes the security check process shown in FIG. 25 based on the security check program 506A read from the ROM 506 (Sa1). At this time, the main control unit 41 enters the security mode, and the game control user program stored in the ROM 506 is not yet executed.

In the security check process, as shown in FIG. 25 , first, a process for determining a time (security time) for controlling to the security mode is executed. At this time, the CPU 505 reads the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES stored in the program management area of the ROM 506 (Sa101). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value is “000” (Sa102).

  If the read value is determined to be “000” in Sa102, the steady set time is set to a predetermined fixed time (Sa103). Here, the steady setting time is a constant time component of the security time regardless of the number of executions of the security check process based on the occurrence of a system reset or the like (the number of times the main control unit 41 enters the security mode). The fixed time is an invariant time component determined in advance based on the specification of the main control unit 41 in the security time, and may be a minimum value that can be set as the security time, for example.

If it is determined in Sa102 that the read value is other than “000”, the extension time selected according to the setting contents shown in FIG. The time is set (Sa104). In this way, when the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, the security time as the execution time of the security check process can be selected in advance in addition to the fixed time. It can be set to any one of a plurality of extension times.

  After executing one of the processes of Sa103 and Sa104, the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is read (Sa105). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value is “00” (Sa106).

  If the read value is determined to be “00” in Sa106, the steady setting time is set as the security time (Sa107). On the other hand, if it is determined that the read value is other than “00”, the variable set time determined corresponding to the read value is added to the steady set time and set as the security time (Sa108). . Here, the variable setting time is a time component that changes every time the security check process is executed, and the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is “01” (short). Mode) or “10” (long mode), and changes in different predetermined time ranges. For example, when the count value in a predetermined free-run counter is stored in the variable security time register built in the main control unit 41 when the system reset occurs, the variable security time register is stored in the processing of Sa108. By using the value as it is, or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value for a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function), the variable set time is random within a predetermined time range at each system reset. It may be determined to change. Thus, when the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “00”, the security time that is the execution time of the security check process is set as the security based on the occurrence of the system reset or the like. Each time the check process is executed, it can be changed within a predetermined time range.

  Here, the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, and the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is other than “00”. In this case, the security time is determined by adding both the extension time set in step Sa104 and the variable setting time set in step Sa108 to the fixed time. become.

  After executing one of the processes of Sa107 and Sa108, the security code stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 is read (Sa109). Here, in a predetermined area of the ROM 506, a security code of a calculation result obtained by calculating the data of the stored content by a predetermined calculation formula is stored in advance. As a security code generation method, for example, a hash value is generated using a hash function, an error detection code (CRC code) is used, or an error correction code (ECC code) is used. A generation method may be used. In a predetermined area different from the security code storage area of the ROM 506, an arithmetic expression for specifying the security code by calculation is encrypted and stored in advance.

  Following the processing of step Sa109, the encrypted arithmetic expression is decrypted and restored (Sa110). Thereafter, the storage code in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 is calculated by the arithmetic expression decrypted in Sa110 to specify the security code (Sa111). At this time, the storage data used for the calculation for specifying the security code is, for example, program data corresponding to all or part of the user program different from the security check program 506A among the storage data of the ROM 506, or predetermined table data May be all or a part of the fixed data constituting the. Then, the security code read in Sa109 is compared with the security code specified in Sa111 (Sa112). At this time, it is determined whether or not the security codes match in the comparison result (Sa113).

If the security codes do not match at Sa113, it is determined that an unauthorized change has been made to the ROM 506, and the operation of the CPU 505 is shifted to the halt state (HALT). On the other hand, when the security codes match in Sa113, the first random number initial setting KRS1 and the second random number initial setting KRS2 stored in the program management area are read out, and the random number circuit setting process shown in FIG. Is executed (Sa114), the random number circuit abnormality inspection process shown in FIG. 27 is executed in order to check the presence / absence of operation abnormality in the random number circuit 509 (Sa115).

In the random number circuit setting process shown in FIG. 26 , first, setting for using the random number circuit 509 is performed based on the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (Sa201). In the present embodiment, the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1” in advance, and setting to use the random number circuit 509 is performed corresponding to this bit value. Subsequently, the random number update clock RGK in the random number circuit 509 is set based on the bit value in the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (Sa202). In the present embodiment, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 is determined in response to the bit value [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being set to “1” in advance. Setting is performed by dividing the frequency by two to be the random number update clock RGK.

  After the setting in Sa202, the random number update rule is set in the random number circuit 509 based on the bit value [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (Sa203). In this embodiment, “10” is set in advance as the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1, and the random number update rule in the random number sequence RSN is automatically changed after the second round. Settings are made.

  Subsequently, based on the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, a start value at start-up in numerical data to be a random value is determined (Sa204). In this embodiment, “1” is set in advance as the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, and the start value of the random number is set to a value based on the ID number.

  Further, based on the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, it is set whether or not to change the start value of the numerical data to be a random value at every system reset (Sa205). In this embodiment, the bit value at the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “0” in advance, and the start value at start-up set in Sa204 is used as it is, and the start value in the random number circuit 509 is used. It is said. When the setting by the processing of Sa205 is completed, the random number circuit 509 starts a random value generation operation. When the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1” in advance, the random number start value is changed every time the system is reset. In this case, for example, when the count value in a predetermined free-run counter is stored in the random number start value register built in the main control unit 41 when the system reset occurs, the random number start is performed in the processing of Sa205. By using the stored value of the value register as it is, or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function), the random number start value is predetermined at each system reset. (For example, a range including all or part of the numerical data included in the count value permutation RCN generated by the random number generation circuit 553) may be determined at random.

  Note that the setting by the random number circuit setting process may be performed autonomously by the random number circuit 509 based on the stored data in the program management area without the processing of the CPU 505 being involved. In this case, the random number circuit 509 may be configured not to perform initialization and not to generate a random value when the main control unit 41 is in the security mode. Then, when the CPU 505 reads the user program stored in the ROM 506 in the main control unit 41 and the user mode is started, for example, a control signal for instructing the initial setting to the random number circuit 509 is transmitted from the CPU 505. In response to the above, the random number generation operation may be started after the random number circuit 509 performs the initial setting. In particular, when the random number circuit 509 is externally attached to the main control unit 41, even when the main control unit 41 is in the security mode, the random number circuit 509 performs program management independently of the processing in the CPU 505. The random number generation operation may be started after initial setting based on the storage data of the area.

In the random number circuit abnormality inspection process shown in FIG. 27 , first, the random number clock abnormality determination counter is cleared, and the random number clock abnormality determination count value that is the count value is initialized to “0” (Sa301). Subsequently, the internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is read (Sa302). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value at Sa302 is “1”. At this time, if the frequency monitoring circuit 551 provided in the random number circuit 509 detects a frequency abnormality in the random number clock RCLK from the random number external clock terminal ERC, the bit value “1” is written as the internal information data CIF4. .

  Therefore, when the read value is determined to be “1” in Sa303, the random number clock abnormality determination count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (Sa304). At this time, it is determined whether or not the count value after the update in Sa304 has reached a predetermined clock abnormality determination value (Sa305). Here, the clock abnormality determination value may be a numerical value determined in advance in order to determine that the clock abnormality is detected when the frequency monitoring circuit 551 continuously detects the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK. If the clock abnormality determination value has not been reached in Sa305, the processing returns to Sa302, and determination based on the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 is performed again.

  When the clock abnormality determination value is reached in Sa305, it is determined that the random number clock is not functioning normally, and the operation of the CPU 505 is shifted to the halt state (HALT).

  If the read value is determined to be “0” in Sa303, the random value abnormality determination counter is cleared, and the random value abnormality determination count value that is the count value is initialized to “0” (Sa306). In the process of Sa303, it is determined that the read value is “0” when the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 read in Sa302 becomes “0” continuously for a plurality of times (for example, twice). You may do it.

  Subsequent to the processing of Sa306, a check value used for checking whether there is an abnormality in the random number value is set to an initial value “0000H” (Sa307). Then, the stored numerical data as the random value is read out from the random value register 559A as the random value register R1D included in the random number circuit 509 (Sa308). For example, in the processing of Sa308, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS is set to “0”, and fetching of the random number value by software is designated. Subsequently, the bit value of the random value fetch specification data RDLT0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random value fetch specification register RDLT is set to “1”, and fetching to the random value register R1D is designated. Note that setting the bit value in the bit number [0] of the random value fetch specification register RDLT to “1” outputs a latch signal instructing the random number circuit 509 to fetch (latch) numerical data from the CPU 505. It corresponds to that. Thereafter, the numerical value data to be stored as the random number value may be read by turning on the register read signal RRS1 supplied to the random number value register R1D.

  After reading the numerical data in Sa308, the read value is set as the random number inspection reference value (Sa309). Subsequently, the numerical value data to be the random number value is further read from the random value register 559A (Sa310). Note that the read operation at Sa310 may be performed in the same procedure as the read operation at Sa308. In addition, a sufficient delay time may be provided between the read operation at Sa308 and the read operation at Sa310 because the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN generated by the random number circuit 509 changes. After the numerical data is read in Sa310, an exclusive OR operation between the random number inspection reference value and the read value in Sa310 is executed (Sa311). Further, a logical sum operation between the calculation result in Sa311 and the check value is executed, and the calculation result is updated to be a new check value (Sa312). For example, the check value may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 507, and each time the process of Sa312 is executed, the calculation result obtained by the process may be saved as a new check value. As a result, changes in all the bits in the numerical data read from the random value register 559A are recorded. If the bit has changed at least once during a plurality of readings, the corresponding bit value in the check value is “1”. "

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the check value is “FFFFH” (Sa 313), and if it is, since the change of the bit value is recognized for all the bits, it is determined that the random number value is normally updated. Then, the random number circuit abnormality inspection process ends. If it is confirmed that the random number value has been updated normally, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS is set to “1”. It is set to instruct the random value fetching to the random value register R1D according to the signal input to the port P0. In this embodiment, a wiring for transmitting the game start signal SS1 from the start switch 7 is connected to the input port P0. Thereby, when the game start signal SS1 is turned on, the random number value can be taken into the random value register R1D.

  When the check value is determined to be other than “FFFFH” in Sa313, the random number abnormality determination count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (Sa314). At this time, it is determined whether or not the count value after the update in Sa314 has reached a predetermined random value abnormality determination value (Sa315). Here, if the random number circuit 509 is operating normally, the random value abnormality determination value is determined so that all the bits of the numerical data read from the random value register 559A are changed at least once. Any predetermined numerical value may be used. If the random value abnormality determination value has not been reached in Sa315, the process returns to the processing of Sa310, and determination for reading numerical data as a random value from the random number circuit 509 again and checking for abnormality is performed.

  When the random value abnormality determination value is reached in Sa315, it is determined that the random number clock is not functioning normally, and the operation of the CPU 505 is shifted to the stop state (HALT).

  The random number circuit abnormality inspection process is not limited to that executed by the CPU 505, and the random number circuit abnormality inspection process may be executed by a built-in circuit in the main control unit 41 other than the CPU 505. As an example, the random number circuit 509 has a function of executing a random number circuit abnormality inspection process. When a frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK is detected or when an abnormality of the random number value is detected, the CPU 505 May be notified. In addition, the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is not limited to that executed at the time of startup, and for example, every time a timer interrupt occurs in the main control unit 41, a part or all of the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is executed. Anyway.

Returning to FIG. 25 , after the random circuit setting process of Sa114 and the random circuit abnormality inspection process of Sa115, it is determined whether or not the security time set in the processes of Sa107 and Sa108 has passed (Sa116). At this time, if the security time has not elapsed, the processing of Sa116 is repeatedly executed and waits until the security time elapses. If it is determined in Sa116 that the security time has elapsed, the security check process is terminated, and the value of the program counter built in the CPU 505 is set to the start address (address 0000H) of the user program in the ROM 506. As a result, the operation state of the main control unit 41 shifts from the security mode to the user mode, and execution of the user program stored in the ROM 506 is started. As described above, at the time of start-up accompanying the input of the user reset signal, the user mode is started without going through the security mode.

  In the user mode, first, built-in devices such as the serial communication circuit 511, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa2), and then the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3). By initialization of the I register and the IY register, an interrupt table address to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and a reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 507 is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 507 is permitted (Sa4), and RAM parities of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 507 are calculated (Sa5). Next, after obtaining the states of the stop switch 36a and the automatic checkout switch 36b and setting the enable / disable of the stop function and the automatic checkout function in a specific register of the main control unit 41 (Sa6). Clear the input data of each switch acquired in the port input processing described later, the final data of each switch that shows the same state as the previous and current input data, and the edge data of each switch that shows a different state of the previous and current final data. (Sa7), and the power interruption flag indicating that a power failure has been detected is further cleared (Sa8). Further, the value of the door monitoring timer for measuring the monitoring interval of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 and the history of the input state of the detection signal from the door opening detection switch 25 are cleared (Sa9), the operation detection command transmission request and the door are cleared. The command transmission request 2 is cleared and the door command transmission request 1 is set (Sa10).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the random number value is latched based on the value of the random number latch flag register, that is, whether or not the numerical value data is captured in the random number value register 559A (Sa11), and the random number value must be latched. If the random number value is latched in the Sa11 step, the random number value for internal lottery is read from the random value register 559A (Sa12), and the process proceeds to the Sa13 step. When the random number value for internal lottery is read from the random value register 559 in the step of Sa12, the random number latch flag register is cleared and new numerical data can be taken in. In the step of Sa12, although the random number value for internal lottery is read, the read random number value is not used, but as a dummy in order to make it possible to take in a new random value according to the operation of the start switch 7. It is to read.

  In step Sa13, it is determined whether the RAM parity calculated in step Sa5 is zero. If the power interruption interrupt processing (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa13, the data stored in the RAM 507 is not normal. In this case, after executing the initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas except the used stack area and the non-initialization area among the storage areas of the RAM 507 (Sa26), is the setting key switch 37 turned on? If the setting key switch 37 is on, a setting command indicating setting start is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa23), and the command stored in the command buffer is transmitted to the serial communication circuit 511. The command storage process to be transferred to the transmission data register 561 is performed (Sa24), the interrupt is permitted (Sa25), and the setting change process That is to shift to a setting change state.

In the command storage process of Sa24, as shown in FIG. 28A, the first byte of command data stored in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Sx1), and then stored in the command buffer. The second byte of the stored command data is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Sx2). The command data transferred to the transmission data register 561 is converted into serial data in the order of transfer to the transmission data register 561 as described above, stored in the transmission shift register 562, and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Will be.

  If the setting key switch 37 is off in step Sa24, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa28), an error command indicating RAM abnormality is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa29), and the command is stored. Processing is performed to transfer the error command in the command buffer to the transmission data register 561 (Sa30), interrupt is permitted (Sa31), and the process proceeds to error processing, that is, a RAM abnormal error state.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa13, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa14). If the power interruption processing (main) is normally performed, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for failure diagnosis is not normal in step Sa14 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption) In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 507 is not normal. Therefore, the process proceeds to step Sa26 and initialization 1 is executed, and then the setting key switch 37 is turned on in step Sa27. For example, after the generation of the setting command indicating the start of setting (Sa23) and the command storing process (Sa24), the interrupt is permitted (Sa25) and the process proceeds to the setting changing process. If the setting key switch 37 is off in step Sa27, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set (Sa28), an error command indicating a RAM abnormality is generated (Sa29), and a command storing process (Sa30) is performed. Is permitted (Sa31), and the process proceeds to error processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa14 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 507 is normal. Therefore, the destructive diagnosis data is cleared (Sa15), and the unstored work, the unused area, and the unused area in the RAM 507 are cleared. After initialization 3 for initializing the used stack area (Sa16), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is on (Sa17). If the setting key switch 37 is on, the process proceeds to step Sa22. Initialization 1 is executed, and after setting command generation (Sa23) and command storage processing (Sa24) indicating the start of setting, interrupt is permitted (Sa25) and the processing shifts to setting change processing.

  If the setting key switch 37 is OFF in the step of Sa17, each register is restored to the state before power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa18), and a return command is generated and stored in the command buffer ( Sa19), a command storage process is performed, the return command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Sa20), the interrupt is permitted, Sa21), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  As described above, in the start-up process, after the security mode is switched to the user mode only at the time of system reset, the security mode is omitted and the user mode is started at the time of user reset.

  In the security mode at the time of system reset, random number circuit setting processing for setting the random number circuit 509 is performed, and in the random number circuit setting processing, setting of a random number update rule, setting of a random number start value, and the like are performed. The security mode is omitted, and the user mode is started. For this reason, the initial value of the random number is reset at the time of system reset, whereas the random number circuit 509 is not set at the time of user reset, and the numerical data that becomes the random number is continuously updated as it was before the reset. Will be. Also, interrupts are not permitted during security mode, and interrupts are permitted after shifting to user mode. Therefore, when resetting the system, before interrupts are permitted, The random number circuit 509 is set.

  Regardless of whether the reset is a system reset or a user reset, first, after the access to the RAM 507 is permitted, all the storage areas (unused areas and unused stacks) of the RAM 507 are processed without performing other processes. Before the determination of whether the stored data is normal or not from the calculated RAM parity, it is necessary to perform the same regardless of whether the stored data of the RAM 507 is normal or not. As a certain process, setting of enabling / disabling of stop function, automatic settlement function, input data of each switch, finalized data, clearing of edge data, clearing of power-off flag, detection interval of detection state of door opening detection switch 25 are set. The value of the door monitoring timer to be counted, the history of the input state of the detection signal from the door opening detection switch 25, the door command transmission request 2 Rear and door command transmission request 1 setting, read the random number from the random number register 559a, a do, then the data stored in the RAM507 is adapted to make a determination of whether normal or not based on the RAM parity.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the control contents of error processing executed by the main control unit 41.

  In the error processing, first, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2), and the error code is stored in the RAM. It is determined whether or not it is an abnormal error (Sb3). If the error code indicates a RAM abnormal error, the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code does not indicate a RAM abnormal error, an error command indicating the occurrence of the error state and its type is generated, stored in the command buffer (Sb4), and command storage processing is performed. Then, the error command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Sb5).

  Next, it is determined whether or not an on change is detected from the reset / setting switch 38 off (Sb6). If no on change is detected from the reset / setting switch 38 off, the reset switch 23 is further turned off. It is determined whether or not a change in on is detected (Sb7). If no change in on is detected from off of the reset switch 23, the process returns to step Sb6. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until a change of on from the off of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  If a change from on to off of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in step Sb6 or a change from on to off from the reset switch 23 is detected in step Sb7, the switch detection state is changed. Edge data indicating that it has changed from off to on or that it has changed from on to off (called a rising edge when it changes from off to on, and a falling edge when it changes from on to off) Clear (Sb8), clear the error code stored in the register (Sb9), return the display state of the auxiliary game display 12 to the display state saved in the stack in the step of Sb1 (Sb10), An error command indicating the cancellation is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sb 1), after transferring the error command in the command buffer to the transmit data register 561 performs command storage processing (Sb12), it returns to the original processing.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is not due to the RAM abnormality, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated to return to the original processing even if the error state is canceled. In the case of error processing due to an abnormality, even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated, the error state is canceled and the original state is not restored.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control content of the setting change process executed by the main control unit 41.

  In the setting change process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 507 is read out, and the read value is set as a display value (Sc1), and whether or not the display value is out of a settable range (1 to 6). (Sc2), if the display value is within the settable range, the process proceeds to step Sc4. If the display value is outside the settable range, the display value is corrected to 1, and the process proceeds to step Sc5.

  In the step of Sc5, after the display value is displayed on the setting value display 24, the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 are turned off to wait for detection of an on change (Sc5, Sc6). When a change from on to off of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected, the edge data is cleared (Sc9), the display value is incremented by 1 (Sc10), and the process returns to the step Sc2.

  Further, when a change from on to off of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc6, the edge data is cleared (Sc9), and the other switches are turned on by referring to finalized data to be described later. (Sc10), if any switch is in the on state, the process returns to the step of Sc5, and if any switch is not in the on state, the value displayed on the set value display 24 is set to 0. (Sc11), and waits until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc12).

  When the setting key switch 37 is turned off in the step of Sc11, the display value is stored in the setting value work (Sc13), and the setting command indicating the end of setting and the new setting value is generated and stored in the command buffer. (Sc14), a command storing process is performed, the setting command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Sc15), and the process proceeds to the game process.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the main control unit 41.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where a bet number can be set, and a process for starting a game when a specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state and the start switch 7 is operated is executed. .

  In the internal lottery process in the step of Sd2, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is allowed based on the internal lottery random value latched simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in the step of Sd1. Process. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 507 based on each lottery result.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  In the game process, a command is generated in accordance with the progress control of the game, set in the command buffer, and immediately after executing the command storage process, the command stored in the command buffer is transmitted to the transmission data register of the serial communication circuit 511. 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

32 to 34 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the BET process executed by the main control unit 41 in the step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 507 is cleared (Se1), a specified number corresponding to the gaming state is set in the RAM 507 (Se2), and the RAM 507 is a replay game. Whether or not the game is a replay game is determined on the basis of whether or not the replay game flag indicating is set (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, a BET command indicating that 3 bets have been added is generated and stored in the command buffer (Se4), and command storage processing is performed. The BET command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Se5), the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se6), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 507 is referred, and the value of the BET counter is specified. It is determined whether or not the number is a bet, that is, whether or not the number of bets serving as a game start condition is set (Se7), and if the BET counter value is not a specified number, the process returns to the step of Se6, and the value of the BET counter If is a prescribed number, the insertion prohibition flag indicating that the medal cannot be inserted is set in the RAM 507 (Se8), and the process proceeds to Step Se10.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, settings before waiting to be made are performed (Se9), and the process proceeds to step Se10. In the setting before waiting for insertion, the insertion disable flag set in the RAM 507 is cleared, and a medal can be inserted.

In step Se10, it is determined whether or not an error code is set in the register, that is, whether or not an error is detected . If an error code is set, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG .

  If no error code is set in the step of Se10, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 507 (Se11). When it is determined in step Se11 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. (Se12), the process proceeds to step Se14, and if it is determined that the medal cannot be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se13), and the process proceeds to the step Se14.

  In the step of Se14, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is on. If the setting key switch 37 is on, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se15). If the value of the BET counter is 0 in step Se15, a setting confirmation command indicating the start of setting confirmation is generated and stored in the command buffer (Se16). Is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Se17), and the setting confirmation processing (Se18), that is, the setting confirmation state is entered. After the setting confirmation process in the step Se18 is completed, the process returns to the step Se10.

  If the setting key switch 37 is not on in step Se14 or if the value of the BET counter is not 0 in step Se15, the process proceeds to step Se19, and whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal. That is, it is determined whether or not there is a inserted medal flag indicating that the passage of the inserted medal is detected. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se19, the process proceeds to the step of Se31, and if the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the inserted medal flag is cleared (Se20), and the non-insertable flag is set in the RAM 507. Whether or not a medal can be inserted is determined based on whether or not a medal can be inserted (Se21). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se31.

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se21, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 507 is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se22), If the value is not the specified number, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se23), a BET command indicating that the bet number is incremented by 1 is generated and stored in the command buffer (Se24), and command storage processing is performed. The BET command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Se25), and the process returns to the Se9 step.

  If the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number in the step of Se22, the credit counter value in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 507 is incremented by 1 (Se26), and a credit command indicating the current credit counter value is generated. The command is stored in the command buffer (Se27), the command storage process is performed, the credit command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Se28), and it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to the step of Se9. If the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion disable flag is set in the RAM 507 (Se30), and the process returns to the step of Se9.

  In step Se31, it is determined whether or not a change from on to off of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating a rising edge of the start switch 7 is set.

  If it is determined in step Se31 that no change from on to off of the start switch 7 has been detected, the process proceeds to step Se41, and if a change from on to off in the start switch 7 is detected, an interrupt will occur. Is prohibited (Se32), the edge data is cleared (Se33), and it is determined whether or not another switch is on based on finalized data described later (Se34). If interrupt is permitted (Se35), the process returns to the step of Se9.

  If none of the other switches are in the on state in step Se34, the bet number that is set in the RAM 507 is further referred to and the BET counter value is the specified number, that is, a bet that becomes a game start condition. It is determined whether or not the number is set (Se36).

If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number in the step of Se36, the interrupt is permitted (Se35), and the process returns to the step of Se9. If the value of the BET counter is the specified number, the value of the random number storage work is internally stored. A random value for lottery is set in a lottery work (Se37), interrupt is permitted (Se38), an unloadable flag is set in the RAM 507, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the flow path of the medal Is set to be set at the start of the game (Se40). After step SE40, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 31 ends the BET process.

  After the change of the start switch 7 from off to on is detected in this way, it is determined that the operation of the start switch 7 is invalid or valid, and the value of the random value storage work is set as the lottery work. In the meantime, interrupts are prohibited and timer interrupt processing (main) is executed during this period to prevent rewriting of the random value storage work value. .

  In the step of Se41, it is determined whether or not a change from on to off of the single BET switch 5 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating the rising of the single BET switch 5 is set. If a change of on from the off of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se41, the process proceeds to a step of Se49, and if the change of on from the off of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the edge data is cleared. (Se42) With reference to the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 507, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se43). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se46, the process returns to the step of Se9. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se44). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to step Se9. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se47, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se45), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se46), and BET indicating that 1 is added to the bet number A command is generated and stored in the command buffer (Se47), command storage processing is performed, the BET command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Se48), and the process returns to Se9.

  In step Se49, it is determined whether or not a change from on to off of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating the rising of the MAXBET switch 6 is set. If a change of on from the off of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se49, the process proceeds to a step of Se58, and if a change of on from the off of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the edge data is cleared (Se50). Referring to the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 507, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se51). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se51, the process proceeds to the step of Se55, and if the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se52). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step Se55. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se52, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se53), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se54), and the process returns to the step of Se51. In the step of Se55, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has been added. If the BET counter has not been added, the process returns to the step of Se9, and if the BET counter has been added, the bet number is added by the added number. A BET command indicating this is generated and stored in the command buffer (Se56), command storage processing is performed, the BET command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Se57), and the process returns to the Se9 step.

  In the step of Se58, it is determined whether or not a change from on to off of the settlement switch 10 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating the rise of the settlement switch 10 is set. If the change of on from the off of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se58, the process returns to the step of Se9, and if the change of on from the off of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the edge data is cleared (Se59). Then, based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 507, it is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se60), and if the game is a replay game, the process returns to Se9. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se60, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se61). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se63, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 507 (Se62), and the process proceeds to Step Se63. In step Se63, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out medals for the value stored in the credit counter or BET counter, that is, medals stored as credits or medals used for setting the number of wagers. Checkout process is performed to control the return. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se63, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 507 is cleared (Se64), and the process returns to the step of Se9.

FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the main control unit 41 in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, a freeze lottery is executed (Si1). In the freeze lottery, whether to control the freeze state based on the result of the internal lottery or the like is determined, and in the case of controlling to the freeze state, the execution time is determined.

  After the freeze lottery in the Si1 step, it is determined whether or not a wait time (approximately 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Si2), and the wait time has elapsed. If not, wait until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the Si2 step, a new wait time is set (Si3).

  Next, the reel motor is set to start rotating, and the reel starts rotating (Si4). Then, a sliding frame number setting process for setting the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table for each rotating reel is performed (Si5), and a setting at the time of completion of stop preparation is performed (Si6). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation becomes valid when the constant speed rotation of the reel is detected in the origin interruption process of the timer interrupt process (main). .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the freeze condition is satisfied, that is, whether it is time to control the freeze state in the freeze lottery (Si7), and the freeze condition is satisfied. If not, the process proceeds to step Si9. If the freeze condition is satisfied, a prescribed value is set in the freeze timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 to measure the time of the freeze state (Si8), and the process proceeds to step Si9. . The value of the freeze timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed four times.

  In step Si9, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze timer counter is 0, that is, whether or not the freeze timer is controlled. When the value of the freeze timer counter is not 0 in the step of Si9, that is, when it is controlled to the freeze state, the process waits until the value of the freeze timer counter becomes 0.

  When the value of the freeze timer counter is 0 in the step of Si9, that is, when the freeze state is not controlled (when the freeze state is not controlled from the beginning, or when the freeze state ends), either stop It is determined whether or not a change from on to off of the switch is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating a rising edge of any stop switch is set (Si10), and a change from off to on of any stop switch is changed. If no reel rotation error is detected, it is determined whether or not a reel rotation error (error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 for a certain period or more) has occurred (Si11), and a reel rotation error occurs. If not, then there will be an insertion error Whether or not a medal insertion is detected, and whether or not a payout error (medal payout is detected in a period other than the period during which medal payout is permitted) is determined. ) Has occurred (Si12, Si13), and if no error is determined in the steps Si11 to Si13, the process returns to the step Si9.

If it is determined that an insertion error has occurred in the Si12 step, or if a dispensing error is determined in the Si13 step, an error code indicating a loading / dispensing error during reel rotation is set in the register (Si14). ), And shifts to the error processing shown in FIG. 29 (Si17). When the error is released, the process returns to the Si9 step again.

If it is determined in step Si11 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Si16), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 29 (Si17). Along with this, the rotation of the reel is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si4 step again and the reel rotation is resumed.

  Further, when a change of on is detected from the off of one of the stop switches in the step of Si10, the edge data is cleared (Si18), and it is determined whether or not the other switch is on (Si19). If there is at least one other switch, the process returns to the step of Si10.

  If all the other switches are in the off state in the step of Si19, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch in which the change from off to on is detected (the stop operation position is obtained). Step number) is obtained and set to the work corresponding to the stop reel (Si20), a reel stop command is generated and stored in the command buffer (Si21), command storage processing is performed, and the BET command in the command buffer is The data is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Si22) and waits until the reel rotation corresponding to the stop operation stops (Si23).

When the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation is stopped, it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped (Si24). if stop, exit the reel rotation processing returns to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

FIGS. 37 and 38 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41 by interrupting and executing the activation process and the game process at regular intervals (0.56 ms interval). Note that other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (main).

  In the timer interrupt process (main), first, after saving the register in use to the stack area (Sk1), the transmission completion value of the status register 563 of the serial communication circuit 511 is acquired, and based on the acquired value. The transmission completion flag stored in the RAM 507 is updated (Sk2). Specifically, if the value of the status register 563 is 1 indicating that command data transmission has not been performed or that command data transmission has been completed, the value of the transmission completion flag is updated to 1, and the status register 563 If the value is 0 indicating that a command is being transmitted or a command is waiting to be transmitted, the value of the transmission completion flag is updated to 0.

  Next, a power failure determination process is performed (Sk3). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 48. If a voltage drop signal is input, whether or not the voltage drop signal is input in the previous power failure determination process as well. If a voltage drop signal has been input in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power interruption flag indicating that is set.

  After the power failure determination process in the step of Sk3, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is set (Sk4). If the power interruption flag is not set, the process proceeds to Sk5 and the power interruption flag is set The process proceeds to a power interruption process (main) described later.

  In step Sk5, port input processing for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port is performed.

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sk6). In the step of Sk6, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether it is 2 or 3, ie, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sk7), and if it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sk11 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sk24 described later is executed (Sk8).

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether or not it is 1, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sk9). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, timer interrupt 1, reel motor Reel starting process (Sk10) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step process (Sk11) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, motor phase signal standby processing (Sk12) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a certain time has been sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step Sk26.

  In the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sk9, LED dynamic display processing (Sk13) for dynamically lighting various indicators, and output processing of control signals and the like for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port (Sk14), a time counter update process (Sk15) for updating various time counters, a door monitoring process (Sk16) for monitoring the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, a door command transmission request, etc., a door command and an operation detection command The command transmission process (Sk17) for performing transfer to the serial communication circuit 511 and the like and the external output signal update process (Sk18) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step Sk26.

  If the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 is found in the step of Sk7, it is further determined by referring to the branch counter value whether it is 3 or not, that is, the timer interrupt 4 (Sk19). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, if it is timer interrupt 3, the passing of the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (pass of the reel reference position) is checked, and the occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected and stopped. Check if the preparation is complete (whether the stop preparation completion code is set). If the stop preparation is complete and the motor is rotating at a constant speed, operate the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel. Processing to pass through origin (Sk20), switch input determination processing (Sk21) for determining whether or not the detection state of switches has changed, operation detection command transmission request, etc. After executing random number reading process to be stored in the random number storing work the (SK22) sequentially reads numeric data from Staphylococcus R1D, the process proceeds to step Sk26.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in the step of Sk19, the stop stored in the work on the stop reel is stored when the stop operation position is stored in the work on the stop reel in accordance with the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. The stop position is determined from the operation position, the stop switch process (Sk23) for calculating the number of steps after which the stop should be performed, and the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process is counted. A stop process (Sk24) for starting braking by two-phase excitation and a final stop process (Sk25) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start of braking in the stop process are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step Sk26.

  In the step of Sk26, the register saved in the stack area in Sk1 is restored, and the processing before the interruption is returned.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed by interrupting the basic process at regular intervals, and the process counter is updated each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. In addition to distributing the load required for one timer interrupt process (main), the power interruption condition based on the voltage drop signal regardless of the process counter value. A power failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the power failure is satisfied.If the power interruption condition is satisfied, the power interruption processing is performed. Disconnection processing can be performed.

  In the timer interrupt process (main), it is determined whether or not the power interruption condition is satisfied. If the power interruption condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the power interruption process. Since interruptions due to power interruptions do not occur during execution of interrupt processing (main), interruption processing can be interrupted during execution of timer interruption processing (main), or timer interruption processing (main) Since it is not necessary to wait for the end of the interruption to perform an interruption process associated with power interruption, the process associated with establishment of the power interruption condition is not complicated.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the control content of the switch input determination process executed by the main control unit 41 in the timer interrupt 3 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

In the switch input determination process, the input data of each switch acquired in the port input process is updated (Sk101), and it is determined whether the detection state indicated by the previous input data is the same as the detection state indicated by the current input data. determined (Sk102), if the detection state indicated by the detection state and the current input data indicated by the previous input data have the same, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

  In the step of Sk102, when the detection state indicated by the previous input data is the same as the detection state indicated by the current input data, that is, when the same detection state is indicated for 2.24 ms, the determined data of the corresponding switch. Is updated (Sk103), and the process proceeds to Step S104. In step Sk103, the current confirmed data is moved to the previous confirmed data, and the detection state indicated by the input data determined to be the same as the previous time is set as the current confirmed data.

In step Sk104, it is determined whether or not the previous confirmed data after the update and the current confirmed data are the same. If the previous confirmed data and the current confirmed data are the same for all the switches, the edge data is determined. cleared (Sk105), it returns to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

  In any one of the switches in Sk104, if the previous confirmed data and the current confirmed data are not the same in any one switch, it is determined whether the switch in which the previous confirmed data and the current confirmed data are different from off to on. (Sk106) If there is no switch changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step Sk108. If there is a switch changed from off to on, a rising edge indicating that the corresponding switch has changed from off to on is set. (Sk107), the process proceeds to step Sk108.

  In the step of Sk108, it is determined whether or not the switch in which the final confirmed data and the final confirmed data have changed from on to off, and if there is no switch changed from on to off, the process proceeds to Sk110, and changes from on to off. If there is a switch, a falling edge indicating that the corresponding switch has changed from on to off is set (Sk109), and the process proceeds to Step S110.

  In the step of Sk110, it is determined whether or not there is a switch in which the previous finalized data and the current finalized data are the same. If there is no switch in which the previous finalized data and the current finalized data are the same, the process proceeds to the step of Sk112. If there is a switch in which the previous fixed data and the current fixed data are the same, only the edge data of the corresponding switch is cleared (Sk111), and the process proceeds to Step Sk112.

In Sk112, an operation detection command transmission request is set, a switch whose detection state has changed (a switch for which edge data is set), whether the switch has changed from off to on, or from on to off (rising edge) Or a falling edge), an operation detection command storage area (operation) assigned to the RAM 507 by generating an operation detection command indicating a detection state (on / off) of another switch (a switch whose detection state has not changed). detection command is stored in the area) temporarily operation detection command until is stored is transmitted (Sk113) that is, after the instruction to transmit the operation detection command, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the random number read process executed by the main control unit 41 in the timer interrupt 3 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

In the random value reading process, it is determined whether or not the numerical data is latched based on the value of the random number latch flag register, that is, whether or not the numerical data is taken into the random value register 559A (Sk201). if not latched, returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. 38 terminates the random number reading process.

If the numerical data is latched in the step of Sk201, the numerical data is read from the random value register 559A (Sk202), and the value stored in the random value storage work is updated to the numerical data read in Sk202 (Sk203). Exit random number reading process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. 38.

  When numerical data is read from the random value register 559 in the step of Sk202, the random number latch flag register is cleared and new numerical data is accepted into the random value register 559.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the control content of the door monitoring process executed by the main control unit 41 in the timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the door monitoring process, first, a history of the input state of the door opening detection switch 25 (a value obtained by continuing to logically OR the determination state of the positive detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the port input process for about 100 ms). The door sensor history is updated (Sk301). That is, a logical sum of the positive detection signal detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 and the door sensor history is taken as a new door sensor history.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the door monitoring timer is 0, that is, whether or not about 100 ms has elapsed since the previous monitoring (Sk302). 1 is subtracted (Sk303), it ends the door monitoring process, returns to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

  If the value of the door monitoring timer is 0 in the step of Sk302, 44 is set as the value of the door monitoring timer (Sk304), and a new time measurement of 100 ms is started. After the door sensor history is acquired in the register and the door sensor history in the RAM 507 is cleared (Sk305), the door open detection switch 25 indicated by the door sensor history acquired in the register and the door command storage area (door) assigned to the RAM 507 are displayed. This is an area where the door command is temporarily stored until the command is transmitted, and is updated to a door command indicating a new detection state when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes). The detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command is compared to determine whether or not there is a change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 (Sk306).

If there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 in the step of Sk306, whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set, that is, the door command transmission is requested when the main control unit 41 is activated or the game is ended. determines whether it is (Sk307), if the door command transmission request 1 is not set, exit door monitoring process, returns to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

When there is a change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 in the step of Sk306, or when the door command transmission request 1 is set in the step of Sk307, the door command transmission request 1 is cleared and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set (Sk308), and a door command based on the acquired door sensor history (detected state of the door open detection switch 25 after the change) is generated and stored in the door command storage area (Sk309). after commanding the transmission of door command to exit the door monitoring process, it returns to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the command transmission process executed by the main control unit 41 in the timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

In the command transmission process, first, whether or not the value of the transmission completion flag updated in the step Sk2 of the timer interrupt process (main) in which the command transmission process is performed is 0, that is, the serial number at the start of the timer interrupt process. It is determined whether the communication circuit 511 is transmitting command data or is waiting for command data transmission (Sk401). If the value of the transmission completion flag is 0, that is, the serial communication circuit 511 is transmitting command data, or, where the state of the transmission waiting command data, and terminates the command transmission processing, returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. 37.

  If the value of the transmission completion flag is not 0 in the step of Sk401, it is determined whether the door command transmission request 2 is set, that is, whether the transmission of the door command is instructed (Sk402).

If the door command transmission request 2 is set in the step of Sk402, the door command transmission request 2 is cleared (Sk403), the door command set in the door command storage area is read and stored in the command buffer ( Sk404), performs the command storage processing transfers door commands in the command buffer to the transmission data register 561 (Sk408), it returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. 37.

  If the door command transmission request 2 is not set in the step of Sk402, it is determined whether or not an operation detection command transmission request is set, that is, whether or not an operation detection command transmission is instructed (Sk405). .

If the operation detection command transmission request is not set in step Sk405, the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. 37. If the operation detection command transmission request is set, the operation detection command transmission request is cleared ( (Sk406), the operation detection command set in the operation detection command storage area is read out and stored in the command buffer (Sk407), command storage processing is performed, and the operation detection command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 ( Sk408), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG .

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the control content of the power interruption process (main) executed when the main control unit 41 determines that the power interruption flag is set in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the power interruption process (main), first, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sm1). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sm2), and all output ports are initialized (Sm3). Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 507 becomes 0 (Sm4), and access to the RAM 507 is performed. Prohibited (Sm5).

  Thereafter, the CPU 505 is stopped due to a decrease in voltage, or a user reset signal is input to restart the system. In this standby state, it is determined whether or not the random number value is latched based on the value of the random number latch flag register, that is, whether or not numerical data is taken into the random number value register 559A (Sm6), and the random number value is latched. If it is, the random number value for internal lottery is read from the random value register 559A (Sm7), and no other processing is performed. When the random number value for internal lottery is read from the random number value register 559 in the step of Sm7, the random number latch flag register is cleared, and the acquisition of new numerical data is permitted. In the step of Sm7, the random number value for internal lottery is read, but the read random number value is not used, but a dummy value is taken in order to enable a new random value to be taken in response to the operation of the start switch 7. Is read out.

  When the voltage drops in this standby state, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted. Further, in this standby state, when the user reset signal is input without the voltage being lowered, the above-described activation process (main) is executed from the user mode, and if the stored data in the RAM 507 is normal, the process returns to the original process. Will be.

  In this embodiment, after prohibiting access to the RAM 507, it is monitored whether or not the random number value is latched, and when the random number value is latched, processing other than the process of reading the latched random value is performed. Although there is no configuration, it is also possible to monitor the output status of the voltage drop signal, determine the voltage recovery when the voltage drop signal is not input, and start the program from the user mode of the startup process (main) good.

  Regardless of whether the reset is a system reset or a user reset, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment first performs all the storage areas of the RAM 507 without performing other processes after the access to the RAM 507 is permitted. Before calculating the RAM parity of the RAM 507 (including the unused area and the unused stack area) and then determining whether the stored data is normal from the calculated RAM parity, it is determined whether the stored data in the RAM 507 is normal. Regardless of the process that needs to be performed in common, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 507 is normal based on the RAM parity.

  For this reason, the processing that needs to be performed in common regardless of whether the stored data in the RAM 507 is normal or not is executed separately when the stored data in the RAM 507 is determined to be normal and abnormal. Since it is not necessary, the capacity of the program used for processing at the time of activation can be reduced.

  In addition, after the main control unit 41 is activated, after the access to the RAM 507 is permitted, the RAM parity is calculated before other processing is performed, so the state before any access to the RAM 507 is performed. Since it is determined whether the stored data is normal based on the calculated RAM parity, it is possible to improve the reliability of the determination of whether the data is normal.

  In the power interruption process, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the RAM parity based on all the data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 507 becomes 0, and the RAM 507 is restored at the time of restoration. It is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 507 is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas including the unused area and the unused stack area is 0. Therefore, the determination can be performed accurately and easily, and even if an illegal program or data is stored in an unused area or an unused stack area, the illegal program or data is restored while being stored. Can be prevented.

  In addition, after calculating the RAM parity and before determining whether or not the stored data is normal from the calculated RAM parity, the RAM 507 is stored in the RAM 507 as a common process regardless of whether or not the stored data is normal. Each switch input data, confirmation data, edge data, that is, data indicating the detection status of each switch is cleared, and the data in the RAM 507 is normal when the main control unit 41 is started. Whether returning to the control state or not returning to the previous control state, it is possible to immediately start checking the detection state of the switch after the interruption is permitted.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CPU 505 reads the security check program 506A stored in the ROM 506 or the like when the system is reset, that is, when a system reset signal is input upon power-on. By executing, it becomes a security mode.

  At this time, a security check process is executed as a process corresponding to the security check program 506A. Here, the security time when the main control unit 41 enters the security mode is stored in advance in the bit number [2-0] or the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES stored in the program management area of the ROM 506. Depending on the bit value, a time component different from the fixed time can be included.

For example, if the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, it can be selected in advance in addition to the fixed time corresponding to the setting contents shown in FIG. Any one of a plurality of extended times can be set as a time component included in the security time. If the bit value [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “00”, the system reset or power-on is performed in correspondence with the short mode or the long mode shown in FIG. A variable setting time that changes in a predetermined time range each time is performed can be set as a time component included in the security time.

  Until the security time set in this way elapses, execution of the user program stored in the ROM 506 is not started. Then, the operation of generating numerical data to be a random number value by the random number circuit 509 may not be started during the period in which the main control unit 41 is in the security mode. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 or the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing due to system reset such as power-on, and so on. By connecting the “board” and inputting an illegal signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent acts such as illegally winning a special role.

  As an example, the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is set to a different value for each model of the slot machine 1. In this case, the extension time of the security mode can be made different for each model of the slot machine 1, and it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 from the operation start timing of the slot machine 1. Further, by setting the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES to “01” or “10”, the variable setting time can be varied for each system reset. This makes it extremely difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 from the operation start timing of the slot machine 1.

FIG. 44 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the random number circuit 509 built in the main control unit 41. FIG . 44A shows the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 mounted on the game control board 40. FIG. 44B shows the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43. As shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B, the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK and the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK are different from each other. It does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency.

As shown in FIG. 44B, the random number clock RCLK rises from a low level to a high level at timings T10, T11, T12,. Then, the random number clock RCLK is supplied to the external clock terminal ERC random number of the main control unit 41, is input to the clock terminal CK of the clock flip-flop 552 provided in the random number circuit 509 shown in FIG. 11. The clock flip-flop 552 responds to the rising edge of the random number clock RCLK input to the clock terminal CK with the latch clock RC0 fed back from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar to the D input terminal. Are taken in (latched) and output as a random number update clock RGK from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 44C, the random number update clock RGK rises from the low level to the high level at the timings T10, T12, T14,..., And is half the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK. The signal has an oscillation frequency. For example, if the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK is 20 MHz, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK is 10 MHz. Since the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK is neither an integer multiple nor a fraction of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK is the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK. Different frequency. The random number generation circuit 553 updates the numerical data in the count value permutation RCN in response to, for example, the rising edge of the random number update clock RGK. The random number sequence change circuit 555 changes the numerical data update order in the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 based on the setting of the random number update rule by the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 as a random number sequence RSN. Output. Thus, the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), is updated in response, such as the rising edge of the random number update clock RGK.

Thus, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112.
And the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 are different from each other, and one oscillation frequency does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency. Therefore, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK and the latch clock RC0 generated by the clock flip-flop 552 of the random number circuit 509 is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK, but the oscillation of the control clock CCLK. The frequency and the oscillation frequency of the internal system clock SCLK that is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK are different. Thus, synchronization between the control clock CCLK, the internal system clock SCLK, and the random number update clock RGK is prevented, and the random number circuit 509 generates the random number circuit 553 and the random number sequence change circuit 555 from the operation timing of the CPU 505. It becomes difficult to specify the update timing of the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN to be performed. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the update operation of the numerical data serving as the random number value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505.

  Further, the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK and the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK are compared to monitor whether or not both oscillation frequencies are synchronized. If both oscillation frequencies are synchronized, the random number update clock It is preferable to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the input state of the PGK and disable the progress of the game. By doing so, the game can be performed in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the operation of updating the numerical data that is the random number value. It is possible to prevent the progress control from being performed.

The latch clock RC0 output from the clock flip-flop 552 is an inverted signal of the random number update clock RGK, the oscillation frequency thereof is the same as the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK, and its phase is equal to the phase of the random number update clock RGK and π It differs by (= 180 °). The latch clock RC0 is branched into a latch clock RC1 and a latch clock RC2 at a branch point BR1. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 44E, each of the latch clocks RC0, RC1, and RC2 becomes an oscillation signal whose signal state changes in a common cycle. The latch clock RC1 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557A. The latch clock RC2 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557B.

  Thus, the oscillation frequencies of the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 generated by branching the latch clock RC0 are different from the oscillation frequencies of the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK. Therefore, it is possible to prevent synchronization between the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2, and an operation in which numerical data serving as a random number value is captured by the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505. It becomes difficult to specify the timing. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the operation of fetching numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505.

The latch flip-flop 557A takes in (latches) the game start signal SS1 transmitted from the start switch 7 and supplied to the input port P0 in response to the rising edge of the latch clock RC1, and latches the game start signal. Output from the output terminal Q as SL1. If the fetching method in random number latch selector 558A is designated as signal input to input port P0, game start latch signal SL1 is output as random number latch signal LL1. Thereby, for example, the game start signal SS1 whose signal state changes between an off state (low level) and an on state (high level) at the timing shown in FIG. 44F is a timing T11 at which the latch clock RC1 rises. T13, T15, captured in the latch flip-flop 557A at ..., becomes the timing T11, T13 in the signal state shown in FIG. 44 (G) and the random number latch signal LL1 which changes at the off and on states And output from the random number latch selector 558A.

  The random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D responds to the rising edge of the random number latch signal LL1 input from the random number latch selector 558A to the clock terminal with the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555. Then, the numerical data serving as stored data is updated (latched).

For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (G), when a rising edge occurs in which the random number latch signal LL1 changes from the OFF state to the ON state at timing T11, the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs the timing R11. As shown in FIG. 44 (H), the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is fetched into the random value register R1D and acquired as numerical data that becomes a random value. Accordingly, the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D can acquire and store numerical data used as a random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start switch 7.

  In this way, the latch flip-flop 557A takes in (latches) the game start signal SS1 transmitted from the start switch 7 and supplied to the input port P0 in response to the rising edge of the latch clock RC1 to play the game The start latch signal SL1 is output from the output terminal Q. At this time, regardless of whether the operation of the start switch 7 is valid or not, the game start transmitted from the start switch 7 and supplied to the input port P0 is started. The signal SS1 is captured (latched), and output from the output terminal Q as a game start latch signal SL1, and accordingly, the random number latch selector 558A receives the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555. The numerical data of the random value register 559A that is latched and becomes the random value register R1D So that the update. That is, the latch flip-flop 557A only needs to detect the rise of the start switch 7 regardless of whether or not the operation of the start switch 7 is in a valid state, and thus the detection circuit for the signal that triggers the latch has a simple configuration. it can.

Further, if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 as shown in FIG. 8B is “1”, for example, numerical data that becomes a random value generated by the random number circuit 509 is displayed. The start value can be changed at every system reset. Thereby, even if the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 can be specified, it becomes difficult to specify the numerical data read from the random value register 559A included in the random number circuit 509, and based on the analysis result of the program By connecting a so-called “hanging board” and inputting a fraud signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent an act such as illegally winning a special role.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by setting the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES to a value other than “00”, it changes within a predetermined time range every time the system is reset due to power-on or the like. The variable setting time to be set can be set as a time component included in the security time. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 or the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing due to system reset accompanying power-on or the like. By connecting the “hanging board” and inputting an illegal signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent an act such as illegally winning a special role.

  Also, by setting the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES to a value other than “000”, any one of a plurality of extension times that can be selected in advance in addition to the fixed time is set as the security time. It can be set as an included time component. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 or the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing due to system reset accompanying power-on or the like. By connecting the “hanging board” and inputting an illegal signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent an act such as illegally winning a special role.

  Further, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 and the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 are different from each other. The oscillation frequency does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency. Therefore, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK and the latch clock RC0 generated by the clock flip-flop 552 of the random number circuit 509 is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK, but the oscillation of the control clock CCLK. The frequency and the oscillation frequency of the internal system clock SCLK that is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK are different. In this way, the control clock CCLK, the internal system clock SCLK, and the random number update clock RGK are prevented from being synchronized. From the operation timing of the CPU 505, the random number circuit 509 generates the random number generation circuit 553 and the random number sequence change circuit 555. It becomes difficult to specify the update timing of the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN to be performed. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the update operation of the numerical data serving as the random number value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505. Also, the oscillation frequencies of the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 generated by branching the latch clock RC0 are different from the oscillation frequencies of the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK. In this way, synchronization between the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 is prevented, and the random number circuit 509 takes in numeric data as a random value from the operation timing of the CPU 505. It becomes difficult to specify the timing. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the operation of fetching numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505.

  The random number circuit 509 built in or externally attached to the main control unit 41 outputs from the random number generation circuit 553 in response to the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 being “1”. The start value of the numerical data in the count value permutation RCN and the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 can be changed every time the system is reset. Thereby, even if the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 can be specified, it becomes difficult to specify numerical data read from the random value register 559A included in the random number circuit 509, and based on the analysis result of the program It is possible to surely prevent an aiming signal or an illegal signal from being input by connecting a so-called “hanging board”.

  In the external bus interface 501 provided in the main control unit 41, the internal resource access control circuit 501A restricts external reading by internal components other than the internal circuit such as the CPU 505 with respect to internal data of the main control unit 41 such as data stored in the ROM 506, for example. Thereby, for example, a program for controlling a game, such as a user program stored in the ROM 506, can be prevented from being read from the outside of the main control unit 41 and provided for analysis or the like. Further, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program and input of an illegal signal due to connection of a so-called “hanging board”.

  In the random number circuit 509 built in or externally attached to the main control unit 41, when the frequency monitoring circuit 551 detects a frequency abnormality in the random number clock RCLK, the random number circuit 509 is stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF. The bit value of the information data CIF4 is set to “1”. Then, when the CPU 505 determines that the number of times that the read value of the internal information data CIF4 is continuously determined to be “1” has reached the clock abnormality determination value, the operation state of the random number circuit 509 is abnormal. Is determined to have occurred. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation state of the random number circuit 509, the operation of the main control unit 41 is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act by inputting an illegal signal as the random number clock RCLK.

  The CPU 505 built in the main control unit 41 writes the bit value “1” to the random value fetch specification register RDLT corresponding to the output of the latch signal to the random number circuit 509, and reads the random value register 559A a plurality of times. Then, all the bits of the read numerical data are monitored, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation state of the random number circuit 509 based on the presence / absence of bit data that does not change. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation state of the random number circuit 509, the operation of the main control unit 41 is stopped. As a result, it is possible to reliably and easily detect that an abnormality has occurred in the operating state of the random number circuit 509 and prevent fraud. In particular, by performing the internal lottery while the numerical data is not normally updated by the random number circuit 509, that is, while the numerical data is fixed, fraud such as always winning a special combination can be prevented.

  The random number circuit 509 built in or externally attached to the main control unit 41 is a numerical data that becomes a random value every time the system is reset when the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “1”. Change the start value of. At this time, for example, a start value that is changed at each system reset may be determined using a count value of a free-run counter built in the main control unit 41, for example. As a result, the initial value can be determined by using different initial value determination data depending on the timing of system reset or the like, and illegal acts due to shooting or the like can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the extension time of the security mode is one of a plurality of extension times that can be selected in advance, corresponding to the bit value [2-0] of the security time setting KSES. Was not changed at each system reset, but the extension time added to the fixed time is determined as one of a plurality of extension times at each system reset, for example, by setting in the user program stored in the ROM 506 You may do it. In this case, the extension time is defined to be longer than the longest variable setting time. Then, after determining a rough extension time, a detailed extension time may be determined. As a result, the security time for entering the security mode at the time of system reset due to power-on or the like can be greatly changed for each system reset, and the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 is updated or updated from the operation start timing of the slot machine 1. It becomes more difficult to specify the numerical data.

  Further, the extension time of the security mode may be determined using an ID number assigned to each chip constituting the main control unit 41. As an example, an extension time corresponding to the calculated value is executed by executing a part or all of an operation for performing a predetermined scramble process on the ID number and an operation such as addition / subtraction / multiplication / division using the ID number. May be set. In this case, the extension time may be randomly determined for each system reset, for example, by changing an arithmetic expression used for determining the extension time for each system reset. Furthermore, the count value of the free-run counter, the ID number, and the like are determined such that, for example, an arithmetic expression for determining the extension time using the ID number is determined corresponding to the count value of the free-run counter stored at the time of system reset. The extended time may be determined randomly at each system reset by using a combination of the above. In addition, when changing the start value of the random number generated by the random number circuit 509 at each system reset, the start value of the random number can be changed by using a combination of the count value of the free-run counter and the ID number. You may decide.

  At the time of system reset, random number circuit setting processing for starting the security mode and setting the random number circuit 509 is performed, and in the random number circuit setting processing, setting of a random number update rule, setting of a random number start value, and the like are performed. When the user is reset, the security mode is omitted and the user mode is started. That is, at the time of system reset, the initial value of the random number is reset, but at the time of user reset, the random number circuit 509 is not set, and the numerical data that becomes the random number is continuously updated as it was before the reset. The Rukoto. This makes it difficult to specify numerical data that is a random number value in the random number circuit 509 from the user reset timing even when the user reset is intentionally performed, and it is possible to more effectively prevent fraudulent acts such as aiming. it can.

  In addition, the random number circuit including the setting of the random number start value is set in the security mode, the update of the numerical data is started, and then the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted after the transition to the user mode. It has become. In other words, the start value of the random number is set before the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted, and the update of numerical data starts from the set start value of the random number. Therefore, it is executed during the timer interrupt process. Although it can be specified to some extent from the determination status of the switches to the timing when the timer interrupt processing is permitted, the timing at which the update of the numerical data of the random number circuit 509 cannot be specified cannot be specified. It is difficult to specify the numerical data that is the random number value in, and it is possible to more effectively prevent fraudulent acts such as aiming.

  In this embodiment, a random number clock having an oscillation frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 by the random number clock generation circuit 43 provided outside the main control unit 41. Although RCLK is generated and supplied to the random number circuit 509, the clock signal supplied to the CPU 505 of the main control unit 41 and the clock signal supplied to the random number circuit 509 are shared by the common clock generation circuit. You may make it produce | generate using the oscillation signal produced | generated by one included oscillator. In this case, for example, a frequency divider for generating the random number clock RCLK and the control clock CCLK is provided, and the latch clocks RC0, RC1, RC2 are synchronized with the control clock CCLK or the internal system clock SCLK. What is necessary is just to set the frequency division ratio etc. in each frequency divider so that it may become difficult to produce. The control clock generation circuit 42 and the random number clock generation circuit 43 may be provided in whole or in part inside the main control unit 41 or outside the main control unit 41.

  In the present embodiment, the random number circuit 509 is supplied with the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43, and the random number update clock RGK and the latch clock RC0 are generated by the clock flip-flop 552. However, an oscillation signal that becomes the random number update clock RGK or the latch clock RC0 may be generated outside the random number circuit 509, such as the random number clock generation circuit 43, for example. Alternatively, a circuit for generating the random number update clock RGK and a circuit for generating the latch clock RC0 may be separately provided in the random number circuit 509. As an example, while generating a random number update clock RGK by a flip-flop similar to the clock flip-flop 552, an inversion circuit for inverting the signal state of the random number update clock RGK is provided, and a signal output from the inversion circuit is latched. It may be used as the clock RC0.

  In the random number circuit 509 applied to the present embodiment, when the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “1”, that is, when the numerical value data is captured in the random value register R1D, a new random value capture request is generated. Even in this case, new numerical data is not taken into the random value register R1D. In such a state, the numerical data in the random value register R1D is read and the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is cleared. It becomes impossible to load new numerical data into the random value register R1D.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 , the game start signal SS1 is input by operating the start switch 7, the numerical data is latched and stored in the random value register R1D, and then the stored numerical data is read out. Until the numerical data of the random value storage work is updated, the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is in a state of “1”, so that the stored numerical data is held, and the game start signal SS1 is input during that time. However, since the new numerical data is not overwritten, the numerical data does not change even if noise is applied to the signal line of the game start signal SS1 due to static electricity or the like.

  Note that the configuration in which new numerical data is not captured in the random value register R1D while the numerical data is captured in the random value register R1D may be configured to prohibit latching of the new numerical data. However, although new numerical data is latched, writing to the random value register R1D may be prohibited.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in a state where the numerical data is taken into the random value register R1D, a configuration is adopted in which the stored numerical data is held until the stored numerical data is read out. However, in this case, even if the operation of the start switch 7 is performed during a period in which the game is not effective, the data is latched and numerical data is held in the random value register R1D. When the operation is enabled and the start switch 7 is operated, an internal lottery is performed based on numerical data latched at a timing different from the timing at which the start switch 7 was originally operated to start the game. New problems will arise.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the random number value register in the random value reading process executed once every four times (about 2.24 ms) of the timer interrupt process executed by interrupting the basic process every about 0.56 ms. It is confirmed whether or not the numerical data is latched in R1D, that is, whether or not the random number latch flag is set. It is designed to read. As a result, the random number latch flag is cleared, and new numerical data can be taken in. That is, at predetermined time intervals (about 2.24 ms), it is confirmed whether or not numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D, and if it is latched, the numerical data in the random value register R1D is read out, The state where the numerical data is held in the register R1D is released, and a new numerical data can be taken into the random value register R1D.

For this reason, as shown in FIG. 46 , the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the start of the game is not permitted, and numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Since the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D can be stored within about 2.24 ms, which is the execution interval of the random value reading process, the start switch 7 before the start of the game is permitted. Even if the numerical data latched by the operation is held in the random value register R1D, the numerical data newly latched can be obtained at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated after the start of the game is permitted.

  Further, in the random value reading process, when numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D, not only the numerical data is read, but also the value of the random value storage work in the RAM 507 is updated to the read numerical data. Each time new numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D, the latched numerical data is read in the subsequent random value reading process, and the numerical data stored in the random value storage work is newly latched. It is designed to be updated to numerical data.

  At the start of the game, instead of the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is acquired and the internal lottery is performed. After the data is read, even if the numerical data changes due to noise on the signal line of the start switch, it will not affect the numerical data of the random number storage work used for internal lottery. Even in such a case, the internal lottery can be performed using the numerical data latched at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated.

  In this embodiment, the value of the random value register R1D is not retained when the power is interrupted, but the RAM 507 to which the random value storage work is assigned retains the stored data even when the power is interrupted. Therefore, even after the operation of the start switch 7 is detected and before the internal lottery starts, even if the value of the random value register R1D disappears due to a momentary power interruption or the like, the numerical data of the random value storage work is maintained. Numerical data latched at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated can be used for the internal lottery.

  In this embodiment, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is set in the lottery work assigned to the RAM 507, and the internal lottery thereafter. In this case, it is determined whether or not the winning combination has been won by performing an operation on the numerical data set in the lottery work, and the internal lottery ends when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. Even if the numerical data stored in the random number storage work is updated by the time, the numerical data acquired at the time when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is not changed until the internal lottery ends. However, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is transferred to the CPU 505. Set the work register, it may be to determine whether or not the player wins the role by performing an operation on numerical values set in the work register data in the subsequent internal lottery.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not the winning combination is obtained by performing an operation on the numerical data stored in the random value storage work. In this case, the operation of the start switch 7 is performed. The numerical data stored in the random number storage work is updated with the newly latched numerical data, for example, by prohibiting timer interrupt processing (main) during the period from the time of detection until the end of the internal lottery By preventing this from happening, it is possible to prevent the numerical data acquired when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected from being changed before the internal lottery is completed.

  In this embodiment, when the detection signals of the switches are input at a rate of once every four times of the timer interrupt processing (main) and the states of the detection signals coincide with each other twice, that is, about 2.24 ms. When the state of the period detection signal is the same, the detection state of the corresponding switch is determined. For this reason, it takes about 2.24 ms to detect the operation of the start switch 7 (change from off to on). However, if the random number reading process is shorter than this time, the start switch is turned from off to on. There is a possibility that the numerical data of the random number storage work is updated to the newly latched numerical data due to noise or the like between the time of the change and the detection. On the other hand, if the random number reading process is longer than this time, the numerical data latched at the timing of operating the start switch 7 may not be reflected in the numerical data of the random number storage work.

  On the other hand, the random number value reading process is also executed at a rate of once every four times of the timer interrupt process (main), and the minimum time required for updating the numerical data of the random number value storing work is about 2.24 ms. Yes, the numerical data of the random number storage work is not updated to the newly latched numerical data from when the start switch 7 changes from off to on, and the start switch 7 is operated. The numerical data latched at this timing can be reflected in the numerical data of the random value storage work.

  In this embodiment, the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the start of the game is not permitted, and numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Since the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D can be stored within the processing execution interval of about 2.24 ms), the operation of the start switch 7 before the start of the game is permitted. Even if the latched numerical data is held in the random number value register R1D, the newly latched numerical data can be acquired at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated after the start of the game is permitted. However, when the numerical data is taken into the random value register R1D, the random number interrupt is generated, and the random value register is generated when the random number interrupt is generated. By reading the numerical data stored in R1D and making it possible to store the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D, it is latched by the operation of the start switch 7 before the start of the game is permitted. Even if the numerical data is held in the random value register R1D, the numerical data newly latched at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated after the start of the game is permitted may be obtained.

  In order to generate a random number interrupt, the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC0 may be set to “1”. When the data is taken in, random number interruption occurs.

  Then, the main control unit 41 may execute the random value latch interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when the random number interrupt occurs. If another interrupt process is being executed when a random interrupt occurs, the random value latch interrupt process may be executed after waiting for the end of the interrupt process being executed.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the control content of the above-described random value latch interrupt process executed by the main control unit 41 in response to the generation of a random number interrupt. Note that other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the random value latch interrupt process.

  In the random value latch interrupt process, first, after saving the register in use to the stack area (Sk1001), the numerical data is read from the random value register 559A (Sk1002), and the value stored in the random number value storage work is The numerical data read in Sk1002 is updated (Sk1003), the register saved in the stack area is restored in Sk1001 (Sk1004), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

  In this way, when the numerical data is taken into the random value register R1D, a random interrupt is generated, and the main control unit 41 interrupts the basic process and executes the random value latch interrupt process. By reading the numerical data in the register R1D, the random number latch flag is cleared, and a new numerical data can be taken in. That is, every time numerical data is fetched into the random value register R1D, the random value latch interrupt processing is executed to read the numerical data in the random value register R1D, so that the numerical data is held in the random value register R1D. The state is released, and new numerical data can be taken into the random value register R1D.

For this reason, as shown in FIG. 48 , the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the start of the game is not permitted, and the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Even if this state is maintained, the numerical data is latched. Since the numerical data of the random number register R1D is read out by the occurrence of an interrupt due to the occurrence of the interruption, it becomes possible to store the newly latched numerical data, so the start switch 7 before the start of the game is permitted Even if the numerical data latched by the above operation is held in the random value register R1D, it is possible to acquire the newly latched numerical data at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated after the start of the game is permitted. .

  Further, in the random value latch interrupt processing, not only the numerical data latched in the random value register R1D but also the random value storage work value in the RAM 507 is updated to the read numerical data, so that the random value register R1D Each time new numerical data is latched, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work is updated to the latest latched numerical data.

  At the start of the game, instead of the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is acquired and the internal lottery is performed. After the data is read, even if the numerical data changes due to noise on the signal line of the start switch, it will not affect the numerical data of the random number storage work used for internal lottery. Even in such a case, the internal lottery can be performed using the numerical data latched at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated.

  In this modified example, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is set as the lottery work assigned to the RAM 507, and the internal lottery thereafter. In this case, it is determined whether or not the winning combination has been won by performing an operation on the numerical data set in the lottery work, and the internal lottery ends when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. Even if the numerical data stored in the random number storage work is updated by the time, the numerical data acquired at the time when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is not changed until the internal lottery ends. However, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the numerical value data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is transferred to the CPU 50. The set in the work register, may be to determine whether or not the player wins the role by performing an operation on numerical values set in the work register data in the subsequent internal lottery.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not the winning combination is obtained by performing an operation on the numerical data stored in the random value storage work. In this case, the operation of the start switch 7 is performed. The numerical data stored in the random value storage work is newly latched, for example, by prohibiting random value interrupt processing that accompanies the generation of random number interrupts during the period from the time of detection until the end of the internal lottery. By preventing the numerical data from being updated, it is possible to prevent the numerical data acquired when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected from being changed before the internal lottery is completed.

  In this modification, the numerical value data in the random value register R1D is read in the random value latch interrupt process. However, in the random value latch interrupt process, the numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D. A latch flag indicating that is set in the RAM 507, whether or not the latch flag is set in the RAM 507 in a basic process such as a BET process or a timer interrupt process (main) is determined, and it is determined that the latch flag is set in the RAM 507 In such a case, the numerical data in the random value register R1D may be read out. Even in such a configuration, the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the start of the game is not permitted, and the numerical value is stored in the random value register R1D. The data is stored and the state is not retained and the game Started newly becomes possible to obtain the numerical data latched at the timing of the start switch 7 has been operated after being allowed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the user reset signal is returned even if the control state of the main control unit 41 is restored to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on or the operation of the main control unit 41 is temporarily stopped at the momentary power failure. , It is possible to return to the control state before the operation is stopped, and the state may return to a state where a prescribed number of bets satisfying the game start condition are set.

  On the other hand, the power supply voltage is unstable during power interruption or instantaneous power failure. In such a situation, the input of the game start signal SS1 is detected by noise or the like, and numerical data is latched, and the random value register R1D. There is a risk that it will be stored and held as it is.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, after completion of the power interruption process (main), it is confirmed whether or not numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D, that is, whether or not the random number latch flag is set. When numerical data is latched in the numerical register R1D, the process of reading the numerical data in the random number register R1D as a dummy is stopped by the operation of the main control unit 41 due to a voltage drop or by the input of a user reset signal. Until it starts, it repeats. As a result, the random number latch flag is cleared, and new numerical data can be taken in.

  For this reason, after power interruption processing (main) is performed due to a momentary power interruption or the like, when restarting by input of a user reset signal, numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D due to noise or the like in the meantime. Even in such a case, since the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D can be stored by being read immediately, the numerical data latched by noise or the like at the momentary power failure, that is, in a state where the game can be started. The internal lottery is not performed using numerical data latched at a timing different from the timing at which the start switch 7 is operated.

  In this embodiment, after the power interruption process (main) is completed, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D, that is, whether or not the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Only when the random number latch flag is set, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D is read. However, after the power interruption process (main) is finished, the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Regardless of whether it is stored or not, the process of reading the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D may be performed repeatedly.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the main control unit 41 is activated, the random number latch flag is set before the game progress control is started, regardless of whether or not the control state before power interruption or user reset is restored. Whether the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. If the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D Since the numerical data newly latched can be stored in the random value register R1D, it is latched and held in the random value register R1D before the game progress control is started after starting. Numerical data, that is, numerical data latched at a timing different from the timing at which the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started. There is no possibility that internal lottery will be performed using the data.

  In this embodiment, after the main control unit 41 is activated, before the game progress control is started, whether or not the random number latch flag is set, that is, the latched numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Only when the random number latch flag is set, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D is read out, but the numerical value stored in the random value register R1D is uniformly read. Data may be read out.

  If the random number latch flag is set regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 is activated and then returns to the control state before power interruption or user reset, the numerical data stored in the random number register R1D However, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D may be read only when returning to the control state before power interruption or before user reset. The numerical data stored in the random value register R1D may be read out only when the control state before the user reset is restored and when the return control state is a state where the game can be started.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 507 is prohibited in the power interruption process (main), the operation stop state or the user reset is waited. However, the voltage drop signal is monitored by monitoring the output state of the voltage drop signal. The configuration may be such that the voltage recovery is determined when no signal is input and the program is started from the user mode of the startup process (main). In such a configuration, when the voltage recovery is determined Whether or not the random number latch flag is set, and when the random number latch flag is set, after reading the numerical data stored in the random number value register R1D, from the user mode of the startup process (main) It is preferable to have a configuration that starts the program, and in this way, the progress control of the game is started at the moment of power interruption. It is possible to reliably read the numerical data held in the random value register R1D in the previous stage and to store the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Using numerical data latched in the random value register R1D before the start, that is, numerical data latched at a timing different from the timing when the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started. There will be no internal lottery.

  Further, in this embodiment, even after the activation of the main control unit 41 and before the progress control of the game starts, the operation is stopped or the user reset is waited for after the completion of the electric processing. The numerical value data held in the numerical value register R1D can be read and the numerical value data newly latched in the random number value register R1D can be stored, but only one of the random number value registers R1D can be stored. It is possible to read the numerical data held in the memory and store the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D. Even in such a configuration, the game can be started. The internal lottery is prevented from being performed using numerical data latched at a timing different from the timing at which the start switch 7 is operated. It can be.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started based on whether or not a rising edge indicating the rising of the start switch 7 is set.

  The rising edge of the start switch 7 is detected by the start switch 7 in the switch input determination process that is executed once every four times (about 2.24 ms). It is set on condition that the definite data based on the state has changed from off to on. Since the deterministic data is data that is updated only when the previous detection state and the current state match each time the switch input determination processing is performed, the rising edge of the start switch 7 is detected when the detection state of the start switch 7 is off. When the switch is in the state, it is set by detecting that the start switch 7 is turned on twice in succession in the switch input determination process.

  On the other hand, since the execution interval of the switch input determination process is about 2.24 ms, the start switch 7 is provided on the condition that at least about 2.24 ms or more is continuously detected after the start switch 7 is turned on. Rising edge is set, and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected.

Thus, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49 , on condition that the start switch 7 is continuously detected for a certain period (at least about 2.24 ms) in a state where the game can be started, The operation of the start switch 7 is detected and the game is started, and the game is prevented from starting even if the start switch 7 is erroneously detected due to noise such as static electricity. it can.

  In this embodiment, the operation of the start switch 7 is detected on the condition that the start switch 7 is continuously turned on for a certain period (at least about 2.24 ms) in a state where the game can be started. The game is started. For example, the detection state of the start switch 7 is confirmed a plurality of times in one switch input determination process, and on the condition that all are determined to be on, The operation may be detected and the game may be started. Even in such a configuration, the game starts when the start switch 7 is erroneously detected due to noise such as static electricity. Can be prevented.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, when the rising edge of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the game can be started, whether or not the random number latch flag is set, that is, the start switch 7 The numerical data is latched by the above operation, and it is checked whether or not the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D, and the game is started only when the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Yes.

  Therefore, the numerical value data is not stored in the random number value register R1D, that is, the random number value used for the internal lottery is not latched, but the game is started and the internal lottery is not performed. The internal lottery can be reliably performed using the numerical data latched at the timing when the switch 7 is operated.

  Next, commands that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sends a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a freeze command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end to the sub control unit 91. A plurality of types of commands including commands, gaming state commands, standby commands, stop commands, error commands, return commands, setting commands, setting confirmation commands, door commands, and operation detection commands are transmitted.

  These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the command type and 1-byte extension data indicating the command content, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the command type from the type data.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game. Sent when a medal is inserted or the bet number is set by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 in a state where is not set. Further, since the BET command is transmitted when the betting number setting operation is performed, it is possible to specify that the betting number setting operation has been performed by receiving the BET command.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, and in a state where a predetermined number of bets is set, Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. Further, since the internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated, it is possible to specify that the start switch 7 has been operated by receiving the internal winning command.

  The freeze command is a command indicating whether or not to control the freeze state when it is determined to control to the freeze state, which will be described later, and the timing in the case of controlling to the freeze state. Sometimes sent.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted each time stop control is performed in accordance with the stop operation of each reel. Since the reel stop command is transmitted when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, it is possible to specify that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated by receiving the reel stop command. .

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is a command that can specify the game state of the next game, and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and controlled to an error condition, an error command indicating the occurrence and type of the error condition is sent and reset. When the error state is canceled after the operation is performed, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power interruption, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power interruption.

  The setting command is a command indicating the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. At the time of transition to the setting change state, a setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is transmitted, and when the setting change state ends. A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is transmitted. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it can be specified that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of setting. .

  The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation command that indicates the start of setting confirmation is transmitted when the setting confirmation state is entered. A confirmation command is sent.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, on (open state) / off (closed state), when the power is turned on, at the end of one game (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting of ”can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (from on to off, from off to on).

  The operation detection command is an operation switch (one BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R) of which the detection state (on / off) has changed, from the detection state off. This command indicates whether it has changed to on or from on to off, and the detection state (on / off) of another switch, and is transmitted when the detection state of any of these operation switches has changed.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in the basic process, and the command data in the command buffer assigned to the non-initialized area is updated to the newly generated command data, and the serial communication circuit The data is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by being transferred to the transmission data register 561 of 511.

  On the other hand, the door command is generated in the door monitoring process of the timer interrupt process (main) and stored in the door command storage area. The door command storage area stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, A door command indicating the detection state is stored. Further, the door command stored in the door command storage area is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by a newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game is finished, a door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of a door command stored in the door command storage area is set, and whether the door command transmission request 1 is set or whether the door is open is detected. When the detection state of the switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When the door command transmission request 2 is set, the door command stored in the door command storage area is set. In the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main) executed after transmission is instructed, it is stored in the command buffer and transferred to the transmission data register 561 of the serial communication circuit 511 to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The

  The operation detection command is used when a change in the detection state of any switch is detected in the switch input determination process of the timer interrupt process (main) (when edge data of any switch is set). Is generated and stored in the operation detection command storage area, and when an operation detection command transmission request is set, transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command storage area is instructed, and a timer allocation executed thereafter In the command transmission processing of the main processing (main), the data is stored in the command buffer and transferred to the transmission data register 561 of the serial communication circuit 511 to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  As described above, both the door command and the operation detection command are stored in the command buffer in the command setting process of the timer interrupt process (main), and transferred to the transmission data register 561 of the serial communication circuit 511 so that the sub-control unit 91 If the door command transmission request 2 is set, that is, if the door command transmission is requested, even if the operation detection command is requested to be transmitted, the door command is transmitted. Since the operation detection command is transmitted only when the door command transmission request 2 is not set, both the door command transmission request 2 and the operation detection command transmission request are set. If the command is sent, the command transmission process sends a door command and sends the next command. Operation detection command in the processing is to be transmitted.

As shown in FIG. 50A, the serial communication circuit 511 completes transmission of the status register 563 when untransmitted command data remains in the transmission data register 561 or command data is being transmitted. When the transmission of the command data stored in the transmission data register 561 is completed, the transmission completion value of the status register 563 is set to 1. The value of the status register 563 can be referred to by the CPU 505. The CPU 505 first acquires the transmission completion value from the status register 563 after saving the register in the timer interrupt process (main). Based on the value, the value of the transmission completion flag in the RAM 507 is updated.

In the command transmission process, first, the value of the transmission completion flag stored in the RAM 507 is confirmed . As shown in FIG. 50B, if the value of the transmission completion flag is 1, that is, command data is not transmitted. Or only when it indicates that the transmission of the command data is completed, the transfer of the door command or the operation detection command to the transmission data register 561 is permitted, and when the value of the transmission completion flag is 0, That is, when there is untransmitted command data remaining in the transmission data register 561 or when command data is being transmitted, even if the door command transmission request 2 is set, the transmission to the door command transmission data register 561 is performed. Transfer is prohibited, and even if an operation detection command transmission request is set, the operation detection command transmission data register Transfer to the data 561 is prohibited.

  In particular, the operation detection command is requested to be transmitted when the switch detection state changes regardless of whether it is invalid or valid. Although the transmission of the command accompanying the game progress control will be delayed, the operation detection command is transmitted only when the command data has not been transmitted or the command data has been transmitted as described above. Since transfer to 561 is permitted, it is possible to prevent the effects related to the progress control of the game from being delayed with the transmission of the operation detection command.

  In this embodiment, a command (hereinafter referred to as a first command) triggered by an event associated with the progress control of the game is generated in the basic process and transferred to the transmission data register 561 to transfer the serial communication circuit 511. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but a command (hereinafter referred to as a second command) triggered by an event that may occur regardless of the progress of the game, such as a door command or an operation detection command, is basically It is generated by a timer interrupt process (main) executed by interrupting the process periodically. In addition, since the command is composed of 2-byte data, if the configuration is such that the second command is immediately transferred to the transmission data register 561 when the second command is generated, it may be accompanied by game progress control in the basic process. After transferring the first byte of command data, the timer interrupt process is interrupted and executed before transferring the second byte, and the second command is inserted between the first byte and the second byte of the first command data. May be received and cannot be received as a regular command on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the transmission completion value in the status register 563 of the serial communication circuit 511 is acquired at the beginning of the timer interrupt process (main), the transmission completion flag in the RAM 507 is updated, and transmission is performed. When 0 is set as the completion flag, that is, when any command remains in the transmission data register 561 or a command is being transmitted, the transfer of the second command to the transmission data register 561 is prohibited. Thus, the second command does not enter between the command data of a plurality of bytes constituting the first command.

  In the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (main), the value of the completion of transmission in the status register 563 is not checked immediately before the second command is transferred to the transmission data register 561, but the timer interrupt process ( The transmission completion flag of the status register 563 acquired at the beginning of the main) is acquired to update the transmission completion flag, and the value of the transmission completion flag is referenced immediately before the transfer of the second command to the transmission data register 561. It is determined whether the transfer of the second command to the transmission data register 561 is prohibited or permitted.

As shown in FIG. 50 (b), after the command data of the first byte constituting the first command is transferred to the transmission data register 561, the command data of the second byte constituting the first command is transferred. When the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at the stage before transfer, before determining whether to prohibit or permit the transfer of the second command to the transmission data register in this timer interrupt process (main), Transmission of the command data of the first byte constituting the first command is completed, the value of transmission completion of the status register 563 becomes 1, and the command data of the second byte constituting the first command is transmitted. 1st byte command data and 2nd byte command data constituting the first command on the assumption that there is no untransmitted first command data. This is because the second command data may be transmitted during this period, and the transmission completion value of the status register 563 acquired at the beginning of the timer interrupt process (main) is set as in the present embodiment. Whether to acquire and update the transmission completion flag and prohibit the transfer of the second command to the transmission data register 561 with reference to the value of the transmission completion flag immediately before the transfer of the second command to the transmission data register 561 By determining whether to permit, before determining whether to prohibit or permit the transfer of the second command to the transmission data register in the timer interrupt process (main), the command of the first byte constituting the first command Even if the data transmission is completed and the value of the transmission completion in the status register 563 becomes 1, the transfer of the second command to the transmission data register is surely prohibited. It becomes possible, during the first byte of command data and 2 bytes of the command data constituting the first command, it is possible to the second command data reliably prevented from being transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) starts, and after saving the register, the transmission completion value of the status register 563 is acquired immediately. At least the timer interrupt process (main) Is the stage before the second command is transferred to the transmission data register, and after the timer interrupt processing (main) starts, the serial communication circuit 511 completes the transmission of the first byte of command data The transmission completion value of the status register 563 may be acquired before the time required for updating the transmission completion value elapses.

  In the present embodiment, the drive control of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R configured by the stepping motor is performed in the timer interrupt process (main), and the first command is transferred to the transmission data register 561. In the timer interrupt process (main), the transfer of the second command is prohibited in the timer interrupt process (main). Since the second command is prevented from entering, the excitation time of the phases of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is constant, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R can be driven stably.

  In this embodiment, the door command and the operation detection command are applied as commands triggered by an event that can occur regardless of the progress of the game. Any command that is required to be transmitted in the interrupt process (main) may be used, and a command indicating that an error that may occur unexpectedly, such as vibration of a gaming machine, may be applied as the second command.

In this embodiment, when any command remains in the transmission data register 561 or when a command is being transmitted, the transfer of the second command to the transmission data register 561 is uniformly prohibited. As shown in FIG. 28B, in the command storing process for transferring command data to the transmission data register 561 in the basic process, the command transfer assigned to the RAM 507 before transferring the command data for the first byte (Sx1). Set the value of the completion flag area to 0 (Sx0), set the value of the command transfer completion flag area to 1 after completing the transfer of the second byte of command data (Sx2) (Sx3), and timer interrupt processing Only when the command transfer completion flag value is set to 1 in the (main) command setting process The configuration in which the transfer of the second command to the transmission data register 561 is permitted and the transfer of the second command to the transmission data register 561 is prohibited when the value of the command transfer completion flag is set to 0. With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 50C, after all the command data composing the first command has been transferred to the transmission data register 561, the last command data Even if the (second byte) still remains in the transmission data register or the transmission shift register 562 and the transmission is not completed (the transmission completion value of the status register 563 is 0), the second Since the transfer of the command to the transmission data register 561 is permitted, the second data is transmitted between the command data of a plurality of bytes constituting the first command. Command data constituting the command does not enter, and the period during which the transmission of the second command is prohibited can be shortened as much as possible.

  The main control unit 41 monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. Specifically, in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, in the port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is converted to a positive logic Open detection switch 25on = 1, 0 is acquired when the door is closed, and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, in the door monitoring process performed every 2.24 ms, in the port input process described above The acquired state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 (the input state that has been the same for two consecutive times) continues to be logically ORed for about 100 ms (45 times of door monitoring processing), and the door opening detection switch is used using the result. 25 detection states are determined. When the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, when the door opening detection switch 25 is turned on (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is on. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned on (opened) during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is off. If the result of this determination and the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command storage area match, it is determined that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command storage area is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 is set. Then, the transmission of the door command is instructed. Further, when the main control unit 41 determines that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main control unit 41 updates the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main control unit 41 sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of a door command stored in the door command storage area. Further, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main control unit 41 updates the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  As described above, the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 is updated by linking to the door command transmission command.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, and stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as operation switches for the main control unit 41 to control the progress of the game. Of these operation switches, the start switch 7 is also used for setting value setting in a setting change state.

  The operation of these switches is not always related to the progress control of the game in all control states constituting from the end of the game to the end of the next game, but is related to the progress control of the game according to the control state. Sometimes it may not be involved.

  In the control state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game, the operation of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the start switch 7 is involved in the progress control of the game, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R The operation is not related to the progress control of the game. Furthermore, even in the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, the bet number has not reached the specified number, that is, the bet number can be further added, and the game start condition is In a state where it is not established, the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is involved in the game progress control, but the operation of the start switch 7 is not involved in the game progress control, while the bet number is defined. In the state where the number has been reached, that is, in the state where the bet number cannot be added and the game start condition is satisfied, the operation of the start switch 7 is involved in the game progress control. 5. The operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not related to the progress control of the game.

  In the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is involved in the game progress control, and the operation of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the start switch 7 Not involved in progress control. Furthermore, even in the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, if all the reels are rotating, all the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are involved in the progress control of the game. In the stop state, only the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel among the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is involved in the progress control of the game, and the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel is the game switch. Not involved in progress control.

  The control state in the present invention is not limited to the control state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game, or the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, but from the end of the game (after changing the setting). In the control state up to the start, the bet number has not reached the specified number, that is, the bet number can be further added and the game start condition is not satisfied, the bet number has reached the specified number A control state in which the number of bets cannot be added and a game start condition is satisfied, a control state in which all reels are rotating among control states from the start of the game to the end of the game, left Control state in which only the reel is stopped, Control state in which only the middle reel is stopped, Control state in which only the right reel is stopped, Control state in which the left and middle reels are stopped, Left and right reels Sealed and has control state, right, control state middle reel is stopped, the wait period state, applicable also for each of the states of the payout period medal. Furthermore, even if the operation of the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is not involved in the progress control of the game in the control state from the end of the game (after the setting change) to the start of the game, the specified number of bets has already been obtained. The control state in which the operation of the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is not related to the progress control of the game because it is set, and the specified number of bets has not been set yet, but no credit remains. In other words, it can be said that the control state is different from the control state in which the operation of the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is not related to the progress control of the game.

  In the setting change state, the operation of the start switch 7 is involved in the change control of the setting value, and the operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not involved in the game progress control. Even in the setting change state, the operation of the start switch 7 is involved in the change control of the set value before the set value is determined. However, after the set value is determined, all the operation switches Not involved in change control. Further, in the setting confirmation state, any operation of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is not involved in the game progress control.

  The main control unit 41 detects these operation switches in a switch input determination process executed during a timer interrupt process (main) executed by interrupting at regular time intervals. In the switch input determination process, the detection state of the operation switch is monitored, and when any operation switch changes from off to on, edge data (rising edge) indicating that the corresponding operation switch changes from off to on Is set, edge data (falling edge) indicating that the corresponding operation switch has changed from on to off is set.

  Then, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the operation switch has been operated based on whether or not the rising edge of the operation switch related to the progress control of the game is set according to the control state at the current stage in the game process. If it is determined that the operation switch is operated, all the edge data is cleared, and the game progress control is executed according to the operation switch operation, and the game progress control is performed. The accompanying commands (BET command, internal winning command, reel stop command, etc.) are transferred to the transmission data register 561 of the serial communication circuit 511 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Even if the operation of any one of the operation switches is detected and the edge data is set, if it is not cleared by the next switch input determination process, it is cleared by the next switch input determination process.

  When determining that the rising edge of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is set in the reel rotation processing, the main control unit 41 determines whether the detection state of the other operation switches is on. When it is determined that the detection state of the other operation switch is on, that is, when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is detected while the other operation switch is being operated, this is effective. The stop operation of the corresponding reel is not performed without the stop operation.

  This is because, when two or more operations are detected among the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, if priority is given to the stop control based on one of the operations, the other stop control is delayed, and the stop mode of the reel This is because there is a possibility that a problem such as unnaturalness may occur, and even if the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is detected while the other operation switches are operated as described above, By not performing the stop control of the reel to be performed, the stop control of the other reel is not delayed by the stop control of the one reel.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 determines that the rising edge of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is set in the reel rotation processing, the detection state of the other operation switch is not limited to the other stop switch. If the detection state of any of the other operation switches is determined to be on, the effective stop operation is not performed and the corresponding reel stop control is not performed. Without extracting only the detection state of the stop switch from the detection state of the operation switch, for example, when on is set to 1 and off is set to 0, the sum of the detection states of all the operation switches is calculated. If the number is two or more, the detection states of all the operation switches can be collectively determined, for example, the other operation switches are determined to be in the detection state.

  When the main control unit 41 determines that the rising edge of the start switch 7 for determining the setting value is set at a stage where the setting value has not yet been determined in the setting change state, When it is determined whether or not the detection state of the operation switch is on, and it is determined that the detection state of any of the other operation switches is on, control to confirm the set value is not performed. Yes.

  This is because, as will be described later, the operation switch used by the main control unit 41 for controlling the progress of the game is diverted as the operation unit in the administrator mode controlled on the sub-control unit 91 side in the setting change state. Even when the start switch 7 for confirming the setting value is operated in a state where the other operation switches are being operated at the stage where the setting value has not yet been confirmed as described above, the setting value confirmation control is performed. By not doing so, even if the start switch 7 is mistakenly operated simultaneously with the operation of the administrator mode, the set value is not fixed and the setting value is not set. However, it is possible to reduce the annoyance of having to change the setting from the beginning by turning off the power again due to an erroneous operation. To have.

  When the main control unit 41 determines a change in the detection state of any of the operation switches in the above-described switch input determination process, the main control unit 41 sets the edge data, and is a switch in which the edge data is set, a rising edge, An operation detection command indicating whether it is a falling edge or a detection state of another switch is generated, stored in the operation detection command storage area, and an operation detection command transmission request is set.

  When the operation detection command transmission request is set, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command storage area is read out in the command transmission process in the timer interrupt process (main), and the serial communication circuit 511 The data is transferred to the transmission data register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sub-controls an operation detection command that can specify that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. The operation switch detected by the main control unit 41 is transmitted to the unit 91 regardless of whether or not the sub control unit 91 is an operation switch related to the game progress control in each control state. It is possible to specify that an operation has been performed, and an effect can be executed in accordance with the operation of an operation switch that is not involved in the progress control of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 transmits an operation detection command indicating that only when the detection state (on / off) of any one of the operation switches changes, and the operation detection The transmission of commands can be reduced as much as possible, the control load related to the transmission of operation detection commands can be reduced, and the sub-control unit 91 does not need to receive operation detection commands more than necessary.

  Further, not only when the detection state of any of the operation switches changes from off to on, but also when the detection state changes from on to off, an operation detection command indicating the change is transmitted, so the sub-control unit 91 side Therefore, since it is possible to identify in real time the detection state of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control, the operation is released not only at the timing when the operation switch operation not involved in the game progress control is started. It is also possible to perform different presentations according to the timing that has been continued for a certain period of time without releasing the timing and operation, or to change the start timing and end timing of the presentation, according to the operation of the operation switch not involved in the progress control of the game Various productions can be performed.

  In this embodiment, when the change of the detection state of any operation switch is detected from the detection of the change of the operation switch from the detection state off to the on state or from the on to the off state, An operation detection command that identifies the detection state of the operation switch is sent, but only the fact that the detection state of any of the operation switches has changed from off to on is detected, and the fact that it has changed from off to on is indicated. When detected, an operation detection command capable of specifying the operation of the corresponding operation switch is transmitted, or only that the detection state of any operation switch has changed from on to off is detected, and from on to off When it is detected that the operation has changed, an operation detection command that can specify the operation of the corresponding operation switch may be transmitted. It is, it is possible to further reduce the transmission of the operation detection command, on top which can reduce the load of the control according to the transmission of the operation detection command, can also reduce the operation detection command received by the sub-control section 91 side.

  In this embodiment, when the detection state (on / off) of any operation switch changes, an operation detection command that can specify the detection state of another operation switch in addition to the detection state of the operation switch is provided. The sub-control unit 91 is configured to transmit to the sub-control unit 91. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the transmission of the operation detection command as much as possible. Not only the detection state of the operation switch whose detection state has changed, but also the detection state of other operation means can be specified, and a plurality of operations such as simultaneous operation of a plurality of switches and operation of only a specific switch can be performed on the sub-control unit 91 side. It is possible to produce an effect that reflects the operation status of the operation switch, and it is possible to produce a variety of effects using the operation of the operation switch. Furthermore, even when the sub-control unit 91 misses the operation detection command, the latest detection state can be specified for all the operation switches based on the operation detection command transmitted next time, and the game progress control is performed. An effect according to the operation of the operation switch not involved in the operation can be reliably executed.

  In this embodiment, only when the detection state (on / off) of one of the operation switches is changed, an operation detection command indicating that is transmitted. Regardless of whether the switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, or the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C , 8R may be configured to transmit an operation detection command that can specify the on / off state at regular intervals. Even in such a configuration, the sub-control unit 91 side detects the operation detection command. It is possible to identify the operation switch that has been operated, and the operation switch that does not participate in game progress control It is possible to perform the production in accordance with the work.

  In the present embodiment, an operation command transmission request is set in the timer interrupt processing (main) switch input determination processing, and is transferred to the transmission data register 561 in the subsequent command transmission processing and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the basic process, it is determined whether or not an operation switch that does not participate in the game progress control is operated, that is, whether or not edge data of the operation switch that does not participate in the game progress control is set. When an operation switch not involved in the progress control is operated, an operation detection command indicating that may be transferred to the transmission data register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In addition, it is specified that the operation switch detected by the main control unit 41 is operated on the sub control unit 91 side. It has become so that, it is possible to perform the production in response to the operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the progression control of the game.

  In this embodiment, a command associated with the progress control of the game is generated in the basic process, transferred to the transmission data register 561, and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but is not involved in the progress control of the game. The operation detection command accompanying the operation of the operation switch is generated in the switch input determination process of the timer interrupt process (main), transferred to the transmission data register 561 in the subsequent command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main), Although it is a structure transmitted to the control part 91, it is determined whether operation of the operation switch in connection with game progress control was detected in the basic process, and operation of the operation switch in connection with game progress control was detected. Control the game in the event that the It is temporarily stored in the buffer, and it is also determined whether or not an operation not involved in the game progress control is detected in the basic process, and the operation of the operation switch is detected when the operation switch operation not involved in the game progress control is detected. An operation detection command indicating that an operation not involved in the control has been detected is generated, temporarily stored in the command buffer in the same manner as the command accompanying the game progress control, and then waiting for transmission in the timer interrupt process (main) When the command is stored in the command buffer, the command may be transferred to the transmission data register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. With such a configuration, the control state of the basic process is related. Therefore, it is possible to share command transmission control.

  In addition, when such a configuration is adopted, there is a possibility that a plurality of transmission waiting commands may be stored before the command stored in the command buffer is transmitted in the next timer interrupt process (main). If a plurality of commands are transmitted continuously, the sub-control unit 91 may be missed, and the processing time of the timer interrupt process (main) becomes long, and the basic process is stagnant. Therefore, when there are a plurality of commands stored in the command buffer, it is preferable to transmit only one command per timer interrupt process (main). However, if only one command is transmitted per timer interrupt process (main), the command transmission timing will be delayed.

  On the other hand, in the case of adopting the above configuration, when the operation switch operation involved in the game progress control and the operation switch operation not involved in the game progress control are detected at the same time, There is a possibility that an operation detection command accompanying the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is generated at the same time and stored in the command buffer. In this case, in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main), it is preferable to prioritize the transmission of the command associated with the game progress control over the operation detection command. The transmission is not delayed, and it is possible to prevent the presentation according to the operation related to the game progress control from being delayed due to the influence of the operation not related to the game progress control.

  The main control unit 41 executes a start-up process when power is turned on, and an interrupt is permitted at the end of the start-up process. Thereafter, a timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular intervals. When the main control unit 41 can return to the state before the power interruption, a return command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 before interruption is permitted in the startup process. Also, if the main control unit 41 cannot return to the state before the power interruption due to an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 507, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality is issued before the interrupt is permitted in the startup process. Sent to. If the setting key switch 37 is in the on state and the RAM 507 is initialized and does not return to the state before the power interruption, the setting command indicating the setting start is issued before the interruption is permitted in the starting process. It is transmitted to the control unit 91. Of the commands transmitted in the startup process, the return command specifies that the main control unit 41 returns to the state before the power interruption. The error command indicating a RAM abnormality and the setting command indicating the start of setting It is specified that the control unit 41 does not return to the state before the power interruption.

  As described above, the operation detection command is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main), and the interrupt process is not permitted until the end of the start process. Therefore, after the main control unit 41 is started, the main control unit 41 is started. An error command indicating a RAM abnormality that indicates that the main control unit 41 does not return to the state before the power failure or a setting start is specified. After the setting command is transmitted, the transmission of the operation detection command is permitted.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the main control unit 41 determines that the state before power interruption is not restored and transmits an error command indicating a RAM abnormality to the sub-control unit 91 or returns to the state before power interruption. Since the operation detection command is not transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 until the return command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, whether or not to return the main control unit 41 is not yet determined. Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute an effect according to the operation specified from the operation detection command, and prevents an effect that is inconsistent with the state of the main control unit 41 from being executed when the power is turned on. it can.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 transmits a return command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, and a setting command indicating start of setting to the sub-control unit 91 in the startup process, and then permits a timer interrupt by permitting the interrupt. Processing (main) is executed, and the operation detection command is transmitted in the command transmission process. In the command transmission process, the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, and the setting command indicating the setting start are already present. It is possible to transmit the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, and the setting command indicating the start of setting prior to the operation detection command without determining whether or not it is transmitted.

  Further, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a voltage drop signal is input at the beginning of the timer interrupt process (main), and executes the power interruption process (main) only when the voltage drop signal is input. Therefore, the operation detection command transmission request is set in the switch input determination processing of the previous timer interrupt processing (main), and the power interruption processing (main) is performed without transmitting the operation detection command based on the operation detection command transmission request. Although the operation may stop, the main control unit 41 clears the operation detection command transmission request at the time of activation, so that the operation detection command that has not been transmitted in the state before the power interruption is detected. After returning, an operation detection command that does not reflect the detection state of the operation switch after the return is not transmitted. For this reason, after the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent an effect corresponding to an operation not related to the progress control of the game from being executed even though the operation switch is not operated at all.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The reception buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub-control unit 91 is the earliest. Based on the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b based on the command received in the stage, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53, 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Performs output control of various rendering devices.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. Control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a command, the sub-control unit 91 stores the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Among these, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the rendering device is performed based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and changes to the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is canceled unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the betting number setting operation is performed during the execution of the effect, that is, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a BET command indicating that the bet number has been set, Is to be canceled. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub-control unit 91 receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, it receives an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received before, the effect being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is terminated. In such a case, by terminating the performance that is being executed, there is an intention to end the game, but the performance continues unnecessarily. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, the sub control unit 91 stores the effect pattern in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received. As a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  In the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91, a detection state storage area in which the change state of the detection state of the operation switch is stored for each operation switch, and an operation detection flag indicating that the operation state of the operation switch has changed are provided for each operation switch. An operation detection flag storage area to be stored is allocated. Furthermore, the detection state storage area is assigned with a detection state before receiving the operation detection command (previous) and a detection state after receiving the operation detection command (this time). The detection state of each operation switch before and after reception is stored.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs the operation detection process 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (sub) that an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. In the operation detection process 1, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command is an operation detection command. If it is determined that the command is an operation detection command, the current detection state stored in the detection state storage area is changed to the previous detection state. , And the detection state of each operation switch indicated by the operation detection command is stored as the current detection state, and when there is an operation switch in which the previous detection state and the current detection state are different, it is changed from off to on. In this case, a rising flag is set as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch, and when it changes from on to off, a falling flag is set as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the detection state of any of the operation switches changes, the main control unit 41 transmits an operation detection command that can specify the detection states of all the operation switches, and the sub-control unit. 91, when an operation detection command is received, the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command stored in the detection state storage area is updated. An operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch is set, and the sub-control unit 91 confirms the presence or absence of the operation detection flag, so that the detection state of the operation switch has changed and the operation detection command How the detection state of each operation switch has changed before and after reception, that is, whether it has changed from off to on, or from on to off, So that the it can be determined.

  For this reason, the sub-control unit 91 can perform an effect or change the effect according to not only the timing when the operation of the operation switch is started but also the timing when the operation is released. Various effects can be performed according to the operation mode of the operation switches not involved.

  In the present embodiment, how the sub-control unit 91 changes the detection state of each operation switch from the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command stored in the detection state storage area. In this embodiment, when the detection state of any of the operation switches changes, the main control unit 41 switches the detection state from changing to off to on. Or an operation detection command that can specify whether the change is from on to off, so that the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command is determined from the operation detection command itself. It is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines whether it changed or not. By setting it as such a structure, the control load of the sub control part 91 accompanying operation of the operation switch which does not affect progress control of a game It can be reduced.

  The detection state storage area stores the detection state of each operation switch, and the sub-control unit 91 sets one of the operation detection flags and indicates the detection state of the operation switch corresponding to the operation detection flag. When a change is identified, it is possible to identify not only the operation switch whose detection state has changed but also the detection state of another operation switch by checking the detection state of the other operation switch in the detection state storage area. ing.

  For this reason, it becomes possible to specify the state in which a plurality of operation switches are operated at the same time, and for example, it is possible to produce an effect by operating a plurality of operation switches simultaneously, such as the operation effect of pattern 1 or pattern 3 Thus, various effects can be performed depending on how the plurality of operation switches are operated.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 detects the left stop switch when performing the effect by operating the operation switches of the left stop switch and the middle stop switch at the same time as in the operation effect of the pattern 1, and If the middle stop switch operation is detected when the right stop switch is not detected, the stage change effect is performed, but both the left stop switch and the right stop switch are detected. When the operation is detected, the operation of the left stop switch and the middle stop switch is detected at the same time as described above. In this case, the stage change effect is not performed.

  That is, when performing a specific operation effect in response to an operation of a specific operation switch, if an operation switch other than the specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch, the specific operation effect is not performed. ing.

  For this reason, a specific operation effect based on an operation of a specific operation switch is performed when the specific operation switch is operated simultaneously with another operation switch or when the other operation switch is operated. Since it is not executed and a specific operation effect is not executed by an erroneous operation, the specific operation effect can be executed only for a player who desires the specific operation effect.

  In addition, when an operation switch other than a specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch as described above, by not performing a specific operation effect, for example, the operation effects of pattern 1 and pattern 3 Even when some of the operation switches for executing each effect overlap, different effects can be executed. That is, the operation effect of pattern 1 is executed by operating the left stop switch and the middle stop switch simultaneously, and the operation effect of pattern 2 is executed by operating the middle stop switch and the right stop switch simultaneously. When the middle stop switch is operated while the left stop switch and right stop switch are operated at the same time, the left stop switch and middle stop switch are operated simultaneously, or the middle stop switch and right stop switch are operated simultaneously. However, it is not possible to determine whether or not it is possible to assign an effect only to one of the simultaneous operations, but an operation switch other than the specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch. If a specific operation effect is not performed, And even cases like operation effect of the pattern 2, can be assigned an effect for each of the simultaneous operation as it can be performed more diverse effect by way of the operation of a plurality of operation switches.

  When the detection state of any operation switch changes from off to on in the operation detection process 1, that is, when the operation of the operation switch starts, the sub control unit 91 corresponds to the operation time counter assigned to the RAM 91c. The operation time counter value of the operation switch to be initialized is initialized. The value of the operation time counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process (sub) is executed, and the elapsed time since the operation switch operation started by referring to the value of the operation time counter Time can be determined.

  The sub-control unit 91 executes the operation detection process 2 every time the timer interrupt process (sub) is executed. In the operation detection process 2, it is determined for each operation switch whether or not the current detection state stored in the detection state storage area is on. If it is on, that is, if the operation of the operation switch continues. Refers to the value of the operation time counter of the corresponding operation switch, and if a predetermined time has elapsed, sets a time elapse flag indicating that to the operation switch. In this embodiment, a 3 second elapsed flag, a 5 second elapsed flag, and a 10 second elapsed flag are set as the time elapsed flag when 3 seconds have elapsed, 5 seconds have elapsed, and 10 seconds have elapsed.

  For this reason, the sub-control unit 91 can perform an effect when a certain time has elapsed since the operation switch has been operated continuously by confirming whether or not the time lapse flag is set. Become.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 counts the time that has elapsed since the detection state of the operation switch has not changed from on to off after the detection state of the operation switch has changed from off to on. The sub-control unit 91 side can grasp the continuous operation time of the operation switch, and the main control unit 41 side does not have a timer for measuring the continuous operation time for each individual switch. It is possible to detect the continuous operation time of the operation switch only by changing the value, but after the operation switch operation changed from off to on on the main control unit 41 side, the operation switch did not change from on to off. By measuring the time and transmitting a command indicating that the operation switch has been operated continuously for the specified time when this time reaches the specified time, the sub-control unit 91 side , It may be able to identify that the operation of the operation switch is operated continuously.

  In addition, when the detection state of any one of the operation switches is changed from off to on in the operation detection process 1, that is, when the operation of the operation switch is started, the sub-control unit 91 sets the continuous operation counter assigned to the RAM 91c. 1 is added to the value of the continuous operation counter of the corresponding operation switch. The value of the continuous operation counter is cleared by a command from the sub-control unit 91 such as when the detection state of another operation switch changes from off to on or at the start of production. It is possible to determine the number of times that a specific operation switch has been operated continuously from the starting point. Then, the sub-control unit 91 can confirm the value of the continuous operation counter, and can produce an effect when the number of continuous operation of the operation switch from a certain starting point has reached the specified number.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 counts the number of times that the detection state of the operation switch has changed from off to on, so that the sub-control unit 91 can grasp the number of consecutive operation switch operations. The main controller 41 does not have a counter for counting the number of continuous operations for each individual switch, and it is possible to detect the number of operation switches by simply changing the program of the sub controller 91. By counting the number of times the operation switch operation has changed from off to on on the main control unit 41 side, and sending the command indicating that the operation switch has been operated the specified number of times when this number reaches the specified number of times, On the side of the sub-control unit 91, it may be possible to specify that the operation switch has been operated a specified number of times.

FIG. 51A is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations, and FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to a symbol combination and a special appearance. FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41 and the winning probability of the re-gamer in each gaming state.

In the slot machine in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52 , the main control unit 41 controls the preparation mode controlled after the bonus ends, and the number of games that have passed without transitioning from the preparation mode to another gaming state is the specified number of games ( In this embodiment, it is controlled by stopping the special outcome in the winning line in the disadvantaged RT, the preparation mode, the disadvantaged RT or the advantageous RT which is controlled by reaching 10 games), or by winning the fall replay in the advantageous RT. Advantageous RT controlled by winning a promotion replay in the normal gaming state, normal gaming state, penalty RT controlled by winning a penalty replay in the normal gaming state, preparation mode, disadvantage RT, normal gaming state, advantageous RT, penalty Inside controlled by winning a bonus at RT Among the bonus controlled by T and the bonus prize, it is controlled to either. The advantageous RT can be said to be an advantageous state for the player over the normal gaming state in that the winning rate of the re-gamer is extremely high as will be described later. In addition, the penalty RT is a normal gaming state in that it is not controlled to another gaming state and is not directly controlled to an advantageous RT until the prescribed number of games (300 in the present embodiment) is consumed or a bonus is won. It is more disadvantageous for the player.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state to the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT, normal gaming state, advantageous RT, penalty RT, internal RT, and bonus. When the game state is a normal game state or advantageous RT, the sub-control unit 91 can control the effect state at an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect for notifying the internal lottery result can be executed. It has become. Further, as described later, when a predetermined point granting condition is satisfied, points relating to the probability of being controlled by the AT are given.

Referring to FIG. 51A, the special combination among the winning combinations includes five types of bonuses of big bonuses 1 to 5 (hereinafter, each big bonus is referred to as BB).

  BB1 is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB2 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB3 is awarded when the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB4 is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Black 7-BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB5 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines.

  When winning one of BB1 to BB3, the game shifts to a bonus that is controlled every game to regular bonus 1 (hereinafter referred to as RB1). Further, when any of BB4 to BB5 is won, the game is shifted to a regular bonus 2 (hereinafter referred to as RB2) which is controlled by each game.

  While the gaming state is in the bonus, a big bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of BB won is set in the RAM 41c. Further, during the regular bonus, a regular bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of RB is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the corresponding regular bonus medium flag is set to the ON state every time the game is started.

  The bonus generated due to the winning of any one of BB1 to BB3 is terminated on condition that 316 or more medals have been paid out. Bonuses resulting from winning of BB4 or BB5 are terminated on condition that 73 or more medals have been paid out.

As shown in FIG. 52 , the game state is controlled to the inside RT from when BB1 to BB5 are internally won until winning. In the internal RT, the probability of winning the replay is higher than in the normal gaming state (the normal gaming state is approximately 1 / 7.28, whereas the internal RT is approximately 1 / 1.72. As shown in FIG. 52 , after the big bonus is over, the gaming state is controlled to the preparation mode.

Even if one of BB1 to BB5 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, they will win these roles. There is nothing. The symbols constituting “BB1” to “BB5” (“black 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”) are not arranged within 7 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, but 5 in the middle reel 2C. This is because they are not arranged within the frame.

  Next, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the small combinations include grape 1 to grape 8, small combination 1 to small combination 12, watermelon, cherry 1, cherry 2, single combination 1, and single combination 2.

  Among the small roles, the watermelon is awarded when a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When the watermelon wins, 3 medals are paid out. Even if the watermelon is won, it will not win if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing. This is because the symbols constituting the watermelon ("watermelon") are not arranged within 7 frames on the left reel 2L and are not arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C.

  Next, among the small roles, Cherry 1 becomes a winning when a “Cherry Replay-Replay” symbol is derived to one of the winning lines, and one medal is paid out. Of the small roles, the cherry 2 is awarded a symbol “cherry” on one of the winning lines for the reel 2 </ b> C, and a single medal is paid out. When the cherry 2 wins, all the pay lines L1 to L4 are won, so four medals are paid out.

  Next, out of the small combinations, the single combination 1 becomes a winning when the symbol “black plum-black plum-BAR” is derived to any of the winning lines, and one medal is paid out. In this embodiment, as will be described later, points are awarded on the condition that watermelon, cherry 1, cherry 2, and one-piece combination 1 are won.

  Of the small combinations, the single combination 2 becomes a winning when the symbol “BAR-white 7-white 7” is derived to any of the winning lines, and one medal is paid out. As will be described later, the single winning combination 2 is set to be able to win only during RB1. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when one winning combination 2 is won, in principle, points are given and navigation stock is given.

  Next, grapes 1 to 8 will be described. Grape 1 is awarded when a combination of “black grapes—black grapes—black grapes” is aligned on any of the winning lines. Grape 2 is awarded when a combination of “black grapes—black grapes—white grapes” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The grape 3 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-black grape-black grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. Grapes 4 are awarded when a combination of “black grapes—white grapes—black grapes” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The grape 5 is awarded when a combination of “black grape-white grape-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The grape 6 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-black grape-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The grape 7 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-white grape-black grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The grape 8 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-white grape-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines.

Here, the symbols constituting each of the grapes 1 to 8 are not arranged within 7 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and are not arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. For this reason, even if one of the grapes 1 to 8 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to be able to win these roles, it will be won. There will be no prizes for the grapes.

  However, as will be described later, grapes 1 to 8 are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination and won simultaneously. In addition, either “black grape” or “white grape” is arranged within 7 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and is arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. In addition, as described above, grapes 1 to 8 are all eight combinations that can be composed of “black grapes” and “white grapes”. For this reason, when the grapes 1 to 8 are won, in principle, any of the grapes can be won.

  Next, the small combinations 1 to 12 will be described. The small role 1 wins when a combination of “replay-black grape-black grape” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The small role 2 is awarded when a combination of “black grape-black grape-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The small role 3 is awarded when a combination of “black grapes-replays-black grapes” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The small role 4 is awarded when a combination of “replay-white grape-white grape” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The small role 5 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-white grape-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The small role 6 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-replay-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The small role 7 wins when a combination of “replay-black grape-white grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The small role 8 is awarded when a combination of “black grape-white grape-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The small role 9 is awarded when a combination of “black grapes-replays-white grapes” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The small role 10 is awarded when a combination of “replay-white grape-black grape” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The small role 11 is awarded when a combination of “white grape-black grape-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The small role 12 wins a prize when a combination of “white grape-replay-black grape” is arranged in any of the winning lines.

Here, among the symbols constituting each of the small roles 1 to 12, “Replay” is arranged within 7 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and is arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C. However, each of “black grape” and “white grape” is not arranged within 7 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and is not arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. Therefore, even if one of the small roles 1 to 12 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R corresponding to the “Black Grapes” and “White Grapes” of the selected small roles are set. If you do not operate at the appropriate timing to be able to win, you will not win the winning small role.

  When any one of the grapes 1 to 8 and the small roles 1 to 12 wins, nine medals are paid out.

  Next, among the winning combinations, the replaying combination will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replaying role includes a normal replay, a promotion replay, a fall replay 1, a fall replay 2, a penalty replay 1, a penalty replay 2, and a control replay. When you win one of the re-players, you will not be paid out medals, but you can start the next game without setting the number of bets again. This is essentially the same as when medals are paid out.

  The normal replay is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the normal replay (“replay”) are arranged within 7 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and are arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C. Therefore, as a general rule, it can be said that the normal replay is a role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if the winning is made.

  The promotion replay is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-watermelon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols ("Replay" and "Watermelon") constituting the promoted replay are arranged within 7 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, the promotion replay can be a prize that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is elected.

As shown in FIG. 52 , after winning the promoted replay in the normal gaming state, it is controlled to the advantageous RT. The promotion replay is set not to win in the internal lottery in the preparation mode, disadvantaged RT and penalty RT, and is set to win in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state with a predetermined probability. For this reason, in the preparation mode, disadvantaged RT and penalty RT, no promotion replay is won. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled to advantageous RT from the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT, and penalty RT, and promoted replay is awarded only in the normal gaming state, and controlled to advantageous RT only from the normal gaming state. It is configured.

  Even in the preparation mode, the promotion replay can be selected by winning with a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%), and it may be configured to be controlled to the advantageous RT from the preparation mode. . Even if it is a penalty RT, it may be possible to draw and win a promotion replay with a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%). In this case, even if a promotion replay is won in the penalty RT, it is controlled to an advantageous RT You may control so that it may not be made.

  The fall replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-black grapes” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The fall replay 2 is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-white grape” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Of the symbols constituting each of the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2, the left reel 2L is arranged within 7 frames and the middle reel 2C is arranged within 5 frames, but the right reel 2R symbol (“black”). Grapes "" White grapes ") are not placed within 7 frames.

However, as will be described later, since the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2 are won simultaneously, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 8R, either the fall replay 1 or the fall replay 2 constitutes the right reel 2R. The symbol can be drawn into the winning line. For this reason, the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timings of the stop switches 8L to 8R, in principle, if they are selected. As shown in FIG. 52 , after winning the fall replay in the advantageous RT, it is controlled to the normal gaming state.

  The penalty replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-black plum” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Penalty Replay 2 is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-White Plum” is aligned on any of the winning lines. Of the symbols constituting the penalty replay 1 and the penalty replay 2, the symbols are arranged within 7 frames on the left reel 2L and arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C, but the symbols of the right reel 2R (“black” "Plum" and "White plum") are not placed within 7 frames.

However, as will be described later, since the penalty replay 1 and the penalty replay 2 are won simultaneously, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 8R, one of the penalty replay 1 and the penalty replay 2 constitutes the right reel 2R. The symbol can be drawn into the winning line. For this reason, the penalty replay 1 and the penalty replay 2 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, in principle, if they are selected. As shown in FIG. 52 , after winning a penalty replay in the normal gaming state, the penalty RT is controlled.

  The replay for control is awarded when a combination of “Replay-White 7-Replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Of the symbols constituting the control replay, the symbols of the reels 2L and 2R ("Replay") are arranged within 7 frames in each reel, while the symbol of the middle reel 2C ("White 7") is 5 It is not placed within the frame. Therefore, even if the control replay is won in the internal lottery, the control replay will not be won unless the stop switch 8C is operated at an appropriate timing. However, as will be described later, since the control replay is won simultaneously with the promotion replay, the fall replay, and the penalty replay, the symbols constituting the promotion replay, the fall replay, and the penalty replay are won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 8C. Can be pulled into the line. Therefore, in principle, the control replay cannot be won even if it is won, but it can be said that it can play either of the replays to be won at the same time.

Next, referring to FIG. 51 (b), described special outcome. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the special items are “Replay-Watermelon-Black Grape”, “Replay-Watermelon-White Grape”, “Replay-Black Plum-Black Grape”, “Replay-Black Plum-White Grape”, “ There are six combinations consisting of “Replay-White Plum-Black Grape” and “Replay-White Plum-White Grape”. In this embodiment, the reel control for stopping the special game at any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 is when any one of the grapes 1 to 8 is won in any game state. This is done when a grape that has been missed and a small part that has been won at the same time as the grape is missed. As a result, when one of the grapes 1 to 8 is won, and the symbols constituting the selected grapes cannot be stopped on any of the winning lines L1 to L4, and both are won simultaneously. When the symbols constituting the small combination cannot be stopped on any of the winning lines L1 to L4, the special outcome can be stopped on any of the winning lines L1 to L4.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described later, it is possible to stop the special roll on condition that the left reel 2L is set to the first stop operation, and one of the grapes 1 to 8 is won. When the symbol constituting the winning grape cannot be stopped by any of the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbol constituting the small winning combination is selected as the winning line. Even if it is not possible to stop any of L1 to L4, the special outcome will not be led out on the winning line unless the first reel 2L is used as the first stop operation.

As shown in FIG. 52 , after the special event stops on the winning line in the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT, or advantageous RT, the normal gaming state is controlled. In addition, the preparation mode shifts to a disadvantaged RT when the specified number of games has elapsed without the special outcome stopping on the winning line. As described above, the disadvantageous RT is continuously controlled until the special event stops on the winning line and is controlled to the normal gaming state, or until the bonus is won and the internal RT is controlled. The normal gaming state is continuously controlled until a bonus is won, a promotion replay is won, or a penalty replay is won. Even if the special game is stopped on the winning line in a game state other than the preparation mode, disadvantaged RT, or advantageous RT, it is not controlled to the normal game state. Further, even if the special game is stopped on the winning line in the normal game state, the control to the normal game state is maintained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53 , the combination of the lottery object combination read as the lottery object role for each gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, the combination of the lottery target combination varies depending on which game state is present. As will be described later as a lottery target combination, a plurality of winning combinations can be read out simultaneously and can be won in duplicate. In FIG. 53 , “+” is written between winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is simultaneously read in the internal lottery.

In FIG. 53 , the lottery object combination is shown in the vertical column, and the gaming state is shown in the horizontal column. In the column where the gaming state intersects with the lottery target, a circle indicates that the lottery target is read out in the gaming state, and a cross indicates the lottery target when in the gaming state. This indicates that the combination is not read out. Also, the numerical value shown below the circle in FIG. 53 indicates the number of determination values of a predetermined setting value (for example, setting value 1). An internal lottery is performed using the number of determination values. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” corresponding to a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). Therefore, for example, the winning probability of the lottery target combination (ordinary “watermelon” in FIG. 53 ) for which “300” is set as the number of determination values is 300/65536.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1 single use 1, BB2 + cher 1 + cherry 2, BB3 + cherry 1, watermelon, cherry 1, cherry 1 + cherry 2, cherry 1 + Cherry 2 + 1 1st hand 1 1st hand 1 grape, left pressed grape 1, left pressed grape 2, middle pressed grape 1, middle pressed grape 2, right pressed grape 1, right pressed grape 2, Lip GR1, Lip GR2 And are sequentially read out as the target combination of the internal lottery.

  Lip GR1 means normal replay + promotion replay + penalty replay, and indicates that normal replay, promotion replay, and penalty replay are read and internal lottery is performed. Lip GR2 refers to normal replay + promotion replay + penalty replay + control replay, and indicates that normal replay, promotion replay, penalty replay, and control replay are read and internal lottery is performed.

  Further, the left-pressed grape 1 means grape + small role 2+ small role 9. Left-pressed grape 2 refers to grape + small role 5 + small role 12. The medium-pressed grape 1 means grape + small role 4 + small role 8. The medium-pressed grape 2 means grape + small role 7 + small role 11. Right-pressed grape 1 means grape + small role 1 + small role 3. The right-pressed grape 2 means grape + small role 10 + small role 6. The grapes in the left, middle and right pushed grapes 1 and 2 refer to grape 1 + grape 2 + grape 3 + ... + grape 8. Therefore, for example, the left-pressed grape 1 indicates that the grapes 1 to 8, the small combination 2, and the small combination 9 are read and an internal lottery is performed.

  BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 + 1 single play 1, BB2 + Cherry 1 + Cherry 2, BB3 + Cherry 1, watermelon, Cherry 1, Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 , Cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1 roll 1, 1 roll 1, grapes, left pressed grape 1, left pressed grape 2, middle pressed grape 1, middle pressed grape 2, right pressed grape 1, right pressed grape 2, normal replay is the internal lottery It becomes a target and is sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery. However, the winning probability of the re-gamer is different between the preparation mode and the disadvantaged RT.

  When the gaming state is advantageous RT, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 + 1 piece 1; BB2 + Cherry 1 + Cherry 2, BB3 + Cherry 1, Watermelon, Cherry 1, Cherry 1 + Cherry 2, Cherry 1+ Cherry 2 + 1 roll 1, 1 roll 1, grape, left pressed grape 1, left pressed grape 2, middle pressed grape 1, middle pressed grape 2, right pressed grape 1, right pressed grape 2, normal replay, Lip GR 3, Lip GR 4 It becomes a target of internal lottery and is sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery.

  Note that the lip GR3 means normal replay + falling replay, and indicates that normal replay and falling replay are read and an internal lottery is performed. Lip GR4 refers to normal replay + falling replay + control replay, and indicates that normal replay, fall replay, and control replay are read and an internal lottery is performed. The fall replay means fall fall replay 1 + fall fall replay 2, and indicates that the fall fall replay 1 and fall fall replay 2 are read and an internal lottery is performed.

  When the gaming state is a penalty RT, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, BB1 + Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 + 1 single use 1, BB2 + Cherry 1 + Cherry 2, BB3 + Cherry 1, watermelon, Cherry 1, Cherry 1 + Cherry 2, Cherry 1+ Cherries 2 + 1 roll 1, 1 roll 1, grape, left pressed grape 1, left pressed grape 2, middle pressed grape 1, middle pressed grape 2, right pressed grape 1, right pressed grape 2, normal replay are subject to internal lottery, It is sequentially read as a target combination of internal lottery.

  When the game state is internal medium RT, watermelon, cherry 1, cherry 1 + cherry 2, cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1, double 1, double 1, grape, left pressed grape 1, left pressed grape 2, medium pressed grape 1, medium pressed Grape 2, right-pressed grape 1, right-pressed grape 2, normal replay, lip GR1, and lip GR2 are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as targets for internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RB1, watermelon, cherry 1, cherry 1 + cherry 2, cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1, 1, 1, 1 and 2, all small roles are subject to internal lottery and are subject to internal lottery It is sequentially read as a role. All small roles are grapes 1-8 + small roles 1-12 + watermelon + cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1 sheets. Further, when the gaming state is RB2, all the small combinations are targeted for internal lottery and are read out as targets for internal lottery.

  The number of determination values acquired in the bonus internal lottery increases as the set value increases. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  Also, the bonus can be won at the same time as each of the combinations of Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 + 1 hand 1, Cherry 1 + Cherry 2, and Cherry 1. Of these, Cherry 1 and Cherry 2 are also referred to as simultaneous winning combinations. Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 + 1 Single-player role 1, Cherry 1 + Cherry 2, Cherry 1 When winning, the ratio of winning at the same time as the bonus is Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 + 1 Single-player character 1, followed by Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 and Cherry The number of determination values is set to be in the order of 1.

Next, paying attention to the number of determination values of the re-playing role and the number of determination values of the special role in FIG. 53 , the winning probability of the re-playing role and the winning probability of the special role are compared for each gaming state. When in the preparation mode, the normal replay is read, and “39000” is set as the number of determination values at that time. In addition, when it is disadvantageous RT and penalty RT, the normal replay is read, and “9000” is set as the number of determination values at that time. For this reason, in the preparation mode, disadvantaged RT, and penalty RT, as a re-playing player, it is possible to win only the normal replay, and no promotion replay, penalty replay, or falling replay that accompanies the transition of the gaming state. As a result, in the preparation mode and the disadvantaged RT, it can be said that the special game is controlled to the normal gaming state only when the above-mentioned special game stops on the winning line. Further, it can be said that the penalty RT is controlled to the normal gaming state only by digesting 300 games which is the prescribed number of games.

  In the normal gaming state, Lip GR1 and Lip GR2 are read, and not only the normal replay but also the promotion replay and penalty replay can be won.

  In the normal gaming state, “4500” is set as the number of determination values when Lip GR1 is read, and “4500” is set as the number of determination values when Lip GR2 is read. In the normal gaming state, when winning a promotion replay, it is controlled to an advantageous RT, and when winning a penalty replay, it is controlled to a penalty RT. It should be noted that the total value of the replay determination values in the normal gaming state in the present embodiment is set to be the same value as the normal replay determination value numbers for the disadvantaged RT and penalty RT. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the disadvantage RT and penalty RT are set so that the winning probability of the re-gamer is the same.

  On the other hand, in the advantageous RT, in addition to the normal replay, the lip GR3 and the lip GR4 are read with high probability, and not only the normal replay but also the fall replay can be won.

  In the case of the advantageous RT, “8000” is determined as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, “16000” is determined as the number of determination values when the Lip GR1 is read, and “number of determination values is“ 16000 "is set. In the advantageous RT, when winning the fall replay, it is controlled to the normal gaming state.

  In addition, in the internal RT, in addition to the normal replay, the lip GR1 and the lip GR2 are read, and not only the normal replay but also a promotion replay and a penalty replay can be won.

  In the case of internal RT, “7600” is determined as the number of determination values when normal replay is read, “15200” is determined as the number of determination values when Lip GR1 is read, and the number of determination values when Lip GR2 is read “15200” is set. Even when the promotion replay or penalty replay is won in the internal RT, the gaming state is not shifted and the internal RT is maintained.

From the above, the probability of winning one of the replays in each of the preparation mode, disadvantaged RT, normal gaming state, advantageous RT, penalty RT and internal RT is as follows from the total number of judgment values assigned as follows: Become.
Replay winning probability when in preparation mode 39000/65536 (approx. 1 / 1.68)
Replay winning probability when disadvantageous RT is 9000/65536 (about 1 / 7.28)
Replay winning probability when in normal gaming state. 9000/65536 (about 1 / 7.28)
Replay winning probability when it is advantageous RT · · 40000/65536 (about 1 / 1.64)
Replay winning probability when penalty is RT 9000/65536 (approx. 1 / 7.28)
Replay winning probability when inside RT is 38000/65536 (about 1 / 1.72)

  From these, in this embodiment, the probability of winning any replay is higher in the preparation mode, the advantageous RT and the internal medium RT than in the disadvantaged RT, penalty RT and the normal gaming state. Is set to For this reason, the preparation mode, advantageous RT, and internal RT have a higher replay win probability and a higher medal payout rate per game than in the disadvantaged RT, penalty RT, or normal gaming state. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the person. In addition, when the internal medium RT is set, the winning probability of the replay that is preferentially drawn over the bonus in the reel control is set to be lower than that in the advantageous RT and the preparation mode as described later. Compared with the case where the same winning probability of replay as in the RT or the preparation mode is set, it is possible to increase the ratio of winning the winning bonus.

Next, the transition of the gaming state will be described based on FIG .

  After the bonus is over, first, a transition is made to a preparation mode in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is high and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than in the disadvantaged RT and the normal gaming state.

  In the preparation mode, when the special game stops on the winning line, the winning probability of the re-gamer is lower than in the preparation mode, and the transition to the normal gaming state where the payout rate of medals per game is low, and the special game wins. Even if the line does not stop, after the start of the preparation mode, when the specified number of games (10 games in this embodiment) elapses, the winning probability of the re-gamer is lower than the preparation mode, and the medal payout rate per game is lower Move to disadvantaged RT. Note that there is no transition from the preparation mode to the advantageous RT or penalty RT.

  In the disadvantaged RT, when the special event stops on the winning line, it shifts to the normal gaming state, and when the special event does not stop on the winning line, the disadvantaged RT is maintained except for the bonus winning. ing. As in the preparation mode, there is no transition from disadvantageous RT to advantageous RT or penalty RT.

  In the normal gaming state, the promotion replay wins, so that the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and the game shifts to an advantageous RT with a high medal payout rate per game. On the other hand, when a penalty replay is won in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the replaying player and the medal payout rate per game are the same as in the normal gaming state, but the penalty that cannot be transferred directly to the advantageous RT Move to RT.

  In advantageous RT, if the fall replay wins or the special outcome stops at the winning line, it will transition to the normal gaming state again, except for the fall fall replay win, special outcome stop, bonus winning, The advantageous RT is maintained.

  In the penalty RT, when 300 games, which is the prescribed number of games, are consumed, the game state is shifted to the normal gaming state again. Otherwise, the penalty RT is maintained. In this state, until the bonus is won and the preparation mode is passed, or until 300 games are consumed, there is no transition to the normal gaming state in which it is possible to shift to the advantageous RT again.

  In addition, when a bonus is won in any one of the preparation mode, disadvantaged RT, normal gaming state, advantageous RT, and penalty RT, the game shifts to an internal medium RT having a higher probability of winning the re-gamer than the disadvantaged RT and normal gaming state. The internal RT is maintained until the winning bonus is won, and the winning bonus is transferred to the bonus.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after the bonus is ended, the transition to the advantageous RT is not performed immediately after a plurality of gaming states such as the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT, and the normal gaming state without immediately transitioning to the advantageous RT that is advantageous to the player. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to increase the interest until the transition to an advantageous RT that is advantageous to the player after the bonus ends.

  In addition, after the bonus is over, it is not possible to shift to the advantageous RT without passing through the preparation mode and the normal gaming state, and although the transition to the advantageous RT is delayed correspondingly, Since the payout rate of medals per game is higher than in the normal gaming state where the staying period is the longest, loss due to delay in shifting to advantageous RT can be reduced. In particular, if the situation is already controlled by the AT, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous period as much as possible other than the period from the normal gaming state to the transition to the advantageous RT. If the bonus is won in the state where the bonus is held and the AT is controlled even after the bonus is over, it is possible to reduce the continuity of the advantageous state as much as possible.

  Also, the preparation mode in which the payout rate of medals per game is higher than in the normal gaming state is higher than the preparation mode due to the passage of the prescribed number of games even if the special event does not stop at the winning line and does not shift to the normal gaming state However, since it shifts to disadvantageous RT where the payout rate of medals is relatively low, the preparation mode does not become more advantageous than necessary after the bonus is completed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game is played in the common operation mode described later, the winning rate of special rolls is 11100/65536 for winning the middle pressed grape and right pressed grape, and about 1 by reel control. Since grapes can be won with a probability of / 3, it is about 1 / 8.86 (7400/65536). Then, as the specified number of games to be transferred from the preparation mode to the disadvantaged RT, 10 games are determined which are larger than the reciprocal of the stoppage rate of special appearance when the game is played in a common operation mode. For this reason, after the bonus ends, the ratio of transition from the preparation mode to the normal gaming state before transitioning to the disadvantaged RT increases, so if the situation has already been determined to be controlled by the AT, the normal gaming state It is possible to further reduce the disadvantageous period other than the period until the transition to the advantageous RT. For example, when a bonus is won in a state where the bonus is controlled and controlled by the AT even after the bonus ends. Further, it is possible to further reduce interruption of advantageous continuity.

In this embodiment, when a plurality of types of re-game players are simultaneously elected (for example, Lip GR1), as shown in FIG. Control is performed to align and stop the re-playing combination determined in accordance with the drawing range of up to four frames on the winning line. FIG. 54A is a diagram for explaining reel control when a plurality of replays are simultaneously won.

  For example, when Lip GR1 including normal replay, promoted replay, and penalty replay is won and operated in the left-handed operation mode, the combination of normal replays among the selected replays is aligned to any winning line When the operation mode is to be pressed in the middle, and when the operation mode is to be pressed in the middle, the combination of promotion replays is stopped to align with any winning line, and the operation mode is to be pressed to the right. Is controlled so that the combination of penalty replays is aligned with any winning line and stopped.

  The left push means an operation mode in which the left reel 2L is first stopped. The middle press refers to an operation mode in which the middle reel 2C is first stopped. The right push refers to an operation mode in which the right reel 2R is first stopped.

  In addition, when Lip GR2 including normal replay, promotion replay, penalty replay, and control replay is selected and operated in a left-pressed operation mode, any combination of normal replays among the selected replays is selected. Controls to stop in line with the winning line, and if it is operated in an operation mode that causes a middle press, controls to stop the combination of penalty replays to align with any winning line, and in an operation mode that causes a right press When operated, control is performed so that the combination of promotion replays is aligned with any winning line and stopped.

The symbols constituting the normal replay and the promotion replay are arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less on the left reel 2L and right reel 2R, are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on the middle reel 2C, and L1 to L4 are used as winning lines. Therefore, according to the stop operation order, the reel control is performed so that the normal replay or the promotion replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R. Further , in each of the penalty replay 1 and the penalty replay 2 alone, the symbols (“black plum” and “white plum”) of the right reel 2R are not arranged within 7 frames, and therefore are missed depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 8R. However, when the Lip GR1 or Lip GR2 is won, the penalty replay 1 and the penalty replay 2 are won simultaneously. For this reason, according to the stop operation order, the reel control is performed so that any one of the normal replay, the promotion replay, and the penalty replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R. In addition , each of the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2 alone is not arranged within 7 frames in the pattern of the right reel 2R ("black grape""whitegrape"), so it is missed by the operation timing of the stop switch 8R. However, when lip GR3 or lip GR4 is won, the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2 are won simultaneously. For this reason, according to the stop operation order, the reel control is performed so that either the normal replay or the fall replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  In addition, when the player wins Lip GR1 or Lip GR2, the reel control is performed so that the normal replay is always won when the user presses the left button regardless of which one is won. For this reason, a common operation mode for winning a normal replay is set for Lip GR1 and Lip GR2.

  In addition, when the lip GR1 is won, the reel control is performed so that the promotion replay is won by pressing the middle and the penalty replay is won by pressing the right. On the other hand, when the lip GR2 is won, the reel control is performed so that a penalty replay is won by pressing the middle and a promotion replay is won by pressing the right. In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation mode for winning the promotion replay and the operation mode for avoiding the penalty replay winning in Lip GR1 and Lip GR2.

  For this reason, in the normal gaming state, as long as the operation is performed in the common operation mode of the left push, it is not possible to win the promotion replay or penalty replay, and the advantageous RT or penalty RT is not controlled. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, if you press middle or right, if you win the Lip GR1 or LipGR2, it will be controlled to the advantage RT by winning the promotion replay with a probability of 1/2, with a probability of 1/2 The penalty RT is controlled by winning the penalty replay.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, it is disadvantageous for the player on the condition that the player is operated in an operation mode other than the common operation mode when the navigation effect described later is not executed in the normal gaming state. In addition, even if the player is selected for the promotion replay by chance and wins a prize and is controlled to the advantageous RT, it is not controlled by the AT in the advantageous RT and the navigation effect is not executed. It is configured so that it is not possible to avoid the stop of the turn and the fall replay winning and to maintain the advantageous RT.

  On the other hand, if a penalty replay is won and the penalty RT is controlled, the penalty RT is maintained until 300 games are consumed, except for the bonus winning, so there is no possibility of being controlled to an advantageous RT. A penalty is imposed. Furthermore, without winning the promotion replay or penalty replay, various operations described below are performed on the condition that the game is operated in an operation mode other than the common operation mode when the navigation effect is not executed in the normal game state. Penalties are imposed, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  As a result, when the navigation effect is not executed in the normal gaming state, the disadvantage due to the penalty is greater than the profit due to operation in an operation mode other than the common operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage for the player by operating in a common operation mode rather than operating in an operation mode other than the common operation mode.

  In addition, when the lip GR3 including the normal replay and the fall replay is won and operated in an operation mode that is left-pressed, the combination of the normal replays among the selected replays is aligned with any winning line and stopped. When the control is performed and the operation mode is the middle press or the right press, the control is performed so that the combination of the falling replays is aligned with any winning line and stopped.

  In addition, when Lip GR4 including normal replay, fall replay, and control replay is selected and operated in the left-handed operation mode, the combination of fall replays among the selected replays is aligned to any winning line. When the operation mode is an intermediate press or a right press, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with any winning line and stopped.

In each of the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2 alone, the design of the right reel 2R (“black grape” “white grape”) is not arranged within 7 frames, so it is missed by the operation timing of the stop switch 8R. However, since the fall replay 1 and the fall replay 2 are won simultaneously, the reel control is performed so that the normal replay or the fall replay always wins regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R according to the stop operation order. .

  For this reason, when the Lip GR3 is won, the reel control is performed so that a normal replay is won when the left button is pressed, and a fall replay is won when the middle button or the right button is pressed. On the other hand, when the lip GR4 is won, the reel control is performed so that the normal replay is won when the left button is pressed, and the fall replay is won when the middle button or the right button is pressed. As described above, the operation mode for avoiding the falling replay winning and the normal replay winning is set so as to be different between the winning of the Lip GR3 and the winning of the Lip GR4.

  Next, when multiple types of small roles are won at the same time (Cherry 1 + Cherry 2, Grapes 1-8, etc.), small roles with a large number of payouts are given priority over small roles with a small number of payouts. Reel control to pull into the line is performed.

When multiple types of small roles are simultaneously elected, grapes (grape 1 to 8), left pressed grape 1, left pressed grape 2, middle pressed grape 1, middle pressed grape 2, right pressed grape 1, and right pressed grape 2 If one of the above is won, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the type of grapes and small roles that were won simultaneously and the reel that was initially stopped (the first stopped reel) are on the left. Depending on whether the reel is a reel, a middle reel, or a right reel, the grapes are controlled to be aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. FIG. 54 (b) is a diagram for explaining the reel control when winning a grape.

For example, when the small role is won by the grapes without winning at the same time, the grapes 1 to 8 are irrelevant regardless of the type of the first stopped reel and the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Reel control is performed so that either one always wins . The symbols constituting each of the grapes 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less on the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on the middle reel 2C, and L1 to L4 as winning lines. Is set, reel control is performed so that any of the grapes 1 to 8 always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  In addition, when the left pressed grape 1 is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, control is performed to stop any one of the selected grapes 1-8 in line with the winning line.

On the other hand, when the left-pressed grape 1 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the control is performed so that either the selected small combination 2 or small combination 9 is aligned on the winning line and stopped. It is carried out. In the symbols constituting the small role 2, the symbols ("black grapes") of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C are not arranged within 7 frames. In addition, the symbols constituting the small role 9 are not arranged within 7 frames for each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R ("black grape", "white grape"). Therefore, when each of the stop switches 8L to 8R is stopped at an appropriate timing according to either of the selected small combination 2 or small combination 9, it can win the corresponding small combination 2 or 9, If the stop operation is not performed at the correct timing, no winning is won and the special outcome shown in FIG. 51 (b) is not derived.

  In addition, when the left pressed grape 2 is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, control is performed so that any of the selected grapes 1 to 8 is aligned with the winning line and stopped.

On the other hand, when the left pressed grape 2 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, control is performed so that either the selected small combination 5 or small combination 12 is aligned on the winning line and stopped. It is carried out. In the symbols constituting the small role 5, the symbols ("white grapes") of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C are not arranged within 7 frames. In addition, the symbols constituting the small role 12 are not arranged within 7 frames for each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R ("white grape", "black grape"). Therefore, when each of the stop switches 8L to 8R is stopped at an appropriate timing according to either the selected small combination 5 or small combination 12, the corresponding small combination 5 or 12 can be won. If the stop operation is not performed at the correct timing, no winning is won and the special outcome shown in FIG. 51 (b) is not derived.

  As described above, when the left-pressed grape 1 or the left-pressed grape 2 is won, the reel control is performed so that any of the grapes 1 to 8 is surely won when the left reel 2L is first stopped. When the reels other than the left reel 2L are stopped for the first time, the reel control is performed so that the selected small role is awarded only when the pull-in is possible, and when the pull-in is impossible, all of them are dropped and the special outcome is not derived. Is called.

Further, when the middle pressed grape 1 or the middle pressed grape 2 is won, the reel control is performed so that any one of the grapes 1 to 8 is surely won when the first reel 2C is stopped, and the middle reel 2C When the other is stopped for the first time, the selected small role is awarded only when the withdrawal is possible, and all the cases are withdrawn when the withdrawal is impossible. At this time, the left reel 2L is when it is the first stop, the reel control so as to derive the winning line one of the special outcome shown in FIG. 51 (b) is carried out.

In addition, when the right-pressed grape 1 or the right-pressed grape 2 is won, the reel control is performed to ensure that any of the grapes 1 to 8 is awarded when the right reel 2R is first stopped. When the ones other than the reels 2R are stopped for the first time, the selected small role is awarded only when the pull-in is possible, and all of them are dropped when the pull-in is impossible. At this time, the left reel 2L is when it is the first stop, the reel control so as to derive the winning line one of the special outcome shown in FIG. 51 (b) is carried out.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the grapes 1 to 8 are surely won according to whether the left pressed grape 1 or 2 is won, the middle pressed grape 1 or 2 is won, or the right pressed grape 1 or 2 is won. By changing the first stop reel for the purpose, the operation mode (winning operation mode) for operating a prize can be changed.

  In addition, the special event can be aligned to any one of the winning lines only when either the middle pressed grapes 1, 2 or the right pressed grapes 1, 2 are won and the left reel 2L is set to the first stop operation. When the reels other than the left reel 2L are set to the first stop operation, the special outcome does not stop on the winning line.

  Here, the probability of falling from the advantageous RT to the normal gaming state will be described. The opportunity to fall from the advantageous RT to the normal gaming state is set to fall replay winning and special outcome stop. The falling replay winning probability is 4000/65536 × 1/2 = 2000/65536 based on the falling replay winning probability and reel control. In addition, when the game is played in a common mode of operation (left push), the probability of winning a special roll is 11100/65536 for the middle-pressed grapes and right-pressed grapes. Since it is possible to win a grape in this, it becomes about 7400/65536.

  Therefore, in the advantageous RT, the probability of falling to the normal gaming state due to the falling replay winning when the performance state is not AT described later is 9400 / 65536≈ 1 / 6.97.

  For this reason, even if a player wins an promoted replay accidentally and is controlled to an advantageous RT by operating in a normal game state in which no navigation effect is executed, it is controlled by the AT in the advantageous RT. Since the navigation effect is not executed, only about 7 games can continue the advantageous RT, and the game falls to the normal gaming state. Further, when the navigation effect is not executed as described above, a penalty is imposed by operating in a manner other than the common operation mode. Therefore, when the game is in the normal gaming state and the navigation effect is not executed, the player can be operated in a common operation mode.

  In addition, the probability of winning a prize by winning a single grape (in case of winning grapes 1-8, excluding the case of winning simultaneously with a small role) is always one of the grapes regardless of the operation mode. Will win 2775/65536.

Next, the reel control when the cherry 1 is won will be described. As shown in FIG. 53 , when Cherry 1 is won by itself, when Cherry 2 is won simultaneously, Cherry 2 + 1 winning combination 1 occurs simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 54 (c) . Reel control is performed.

First, when the cherry 1 is elected alone, reel control is performed to preferentially draw “cherry replay-replay” that is a symbol constituting the cherry 1 into any of the winning lines . Among the symbols constituting the cherry 1, the “replay” that is the symbol of each of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R is arranged at intervals of 5 frames or 7 frames, but the symbol of the left reel 2L is “cherry” Are not arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less, reel control is performed so as to win according to the stop operation timing of the stop switch 8L.

  Next, when the cherry 1 + cherry 2 is won, reel control is performed in which the “cherry” of the left reel 2L and the “cherry” of the middle reel 2C are preferentially drawn into one of the winning lines. When the “cherry” of the middle reel 2C cannot be drawn on the winning line, that is, when the cherry 2 is missed, reel control for winning the cherry 1 is performed. As a result, as long as the pull-in is possible, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C can be stopped by aligning “cherry” on the winning line. For the right reel 2R, reel control is performed so that “replay” is drawn onto the winning line, and for “cherry”, reel control is performed so as not to be drawn at least on the winning line. That is, when the cherry 1 + cherry 2 is won, the “cherry” can be stopped in alignment with the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, but the reel control is performed so that the right reel 2R is not stopped evenly. .

  Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 + 1 When the winning combination 1 is won, “Cherry” on the left reel 2L, “Cherry” on the middle reel 2C, and “Cherry” on the right reel 2R are given priority to any of the winning lines. Pull-in reel control is performed. As a result, as long as the pull-in is possible, the “cherry” can be stopped on the winning line with the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. That is, when the cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1 winning combination 1 is won, reel control is performed so that “cherry” can be stopped together on the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. When the “cherry” of the middle reel 2C cannot be drawn on the winning line, that is, when the cherry 2 is missed, reel control for winning the cherry 1 is performed. Further, when the cherry 1 cannot be won, reel control is performed to draw the symbols constituting the single winning combination 1 as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 53 , Cherry 1 and Cherry 2 are the simultaneous winning combinations that are simultaneously won with the bonus, and Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 + 1 Sheet 1 is the highest, followed by Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 and Cherry 1 in this order. The number of judgment values is set so that Further, when the cherry 1 or the cherry 2 is won, the reel control shown in FIG. 54 (c) is performed. Therefore, the more “Cherry” symbols appear on the winning line, the more expectation that the bonus is won can be improved, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, on the condition that the winning combination of Cherry 1 and Cherry 2 is won, the sub control unit 91 performs a navigation effect according to the internal winning situation over a predetermined period (for example, 5 games). It is executed and is controlled during a navigable period in which a continuous effect is given that indicates that the bonus is won.

  The sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment relates to point-related processing for giving / managing and notifying points, AT control processing for controlling the effect state to AT in accordance with the gaming state, etc. A penalty setting process for imposing a penalty that is disadvantageous to the user.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs the first AT lottery by executing the first AT lottery process included in the AT control process. In the first AT lottery process, when it is determined that the bonus is won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41, the first AT lottery is performed according to the probability according to the total number of points actually given after the end of the previous bonus. Is executed. In the first AT lottery process, when it is determined that the bonus has ended based on a command from the main control unit 41, the first AT lottery is executed according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points awarded during the bonus. .

FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining lottery conditions that trigger the execution of the first AT lottery. FIGS. 56 and 57 are diagrams for explaining tables referred to in the first AT lottery.

In the first AT lottery, as shown in FIG. 55 , when it is determined that the bonus is won, the bonus winning table shown in FIG. 56 is referred to, and when it is determined that the bonus has ended, the bonus end table shown in FIG. , The number of navigation stock is determined according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points awarded. Whether or not a bonus is won is specified by, for example, an internal winning command from the main control unit 41. Further, whether or not the bonus has ended is specified from a gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example.

  The number of navigation stocks indicates a period during which the AT can be controlled. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks, the AT is controlled while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50), and the navigation effect can be executed during that time. Accordingly, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player because the AT is controlled over a longer period. In this embodiment, the number of navigation stocks determined in the first AT lottery based on the bonus winning, the number of navigation stocks determined in the second AT lottery based on the bonus winning to be described later, and the navigation stock determined in the first AT lottery based on the bonus end. Depending on the total number, the AT is controlled after the bonus is over. When the number of games digested in the non-AT after the previous bonus is over reaches a predetermined number of games, the AT is controlled until the next bonus winning regardless of the result of the AT lottery.

  When the number of navigation stocks of 1 or more is determined in the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery, the sub-control unit 91 indicates AT and indicates the number of navigation stocks (the total number of the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery). The flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. Based on the AT flag in the RAM 91c, the sub-control unit 91 specifies whether or not to control to AT, and specifies the remaining number of navigation stocks.

  When the number of navigation stocks is given when the AT flag indicating AT is set, the number of navigation stocks given this time may be added to the stock number specified from the AT flag. The navigation stock number assigned this time may be rewritten.

  For example, when the AT flag indicating that the AT is set and the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery is performed by the bonus winning, the AT flag corresponding to the result of the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery Updated to The update to the AT flag corresponding to the result of the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery is, for example, that the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c is set to the number of the first AT lottery or the second AT. It may be possible to rewrite an AT flag that specifies the number of navigation stock added by adding the number of navigation stocks according to the lottery result, and the AT flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c is used for the first AT lottery or It may be rewritten to an AT flag indicating the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the result of the second AT lottery. Any method may be used as long as the current AT flag according to the result of the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery can be specified.

  In addition, when the number of navigation stock is given after the AT flag indicating that the AT is set after the first AT lottery is performed by the bonus winning, for example, the AT flag for specifying the number of navigation stock added and added To be rewritten.

  For example, after the AT flag indicating that the first AT lottery is performed and the AT is set by the bonus winning, for example, the second AT lottery by the bonus winning or the first AT lottery by the end of the bonus is performed and further one or more When the number of navigation stocks is determined, the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 91c is added to the result of the second AT lottery by the bonus winning and the result of the first AT lottery by the end of the bonus. The corresponding number of navigation stocks is added and added to the AT flag that specifies the number of navigation stocks.

The case where the bonus winning table shown in FIG. 56 is referred to in the first AT lottery will be described. If the total number of points granted outside the bonus is “0-2” when the bonus is won (hereinafter also referred to as the total number of normal points granted), the number of navigation stocks is 90%. Navistock number was determined to be 1 at a rate of 5%, Navistock number was determined to be 3 at a rate of 2%, Navistock number was determined to be 5 at a rate of 2%, 1% The first AT lottery at the time of winning the bonus is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 in proportion.

  When the total number of granted points is “3-5”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 50%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 15%. 3 is determined, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of granted points is “6-9”, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at 70%, the navigation stock number is determined to be 3 at 20%, and the navigation stock number is at 5%. Is determined to be 5, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of granted points is “10”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 70%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 10%, and the number of navigation stocks is 10 at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the time of winning the bonus is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 10%. As will be described later, the upper limit of the total number of normal granted points is set to “10”.

As described above, the bonus winning table in FIG. 56 is determined such that the larger the total number of granted points, the higher the number of navigation stocks that is 1 or more and the greater the number of navigation stocks, that is, the more advantageous for the player. AT lottery at the time of winning the bonus will be held. Further, when the total number of granted points is 6 or more, the number of navigation stock is always determined to be 1 or more. For this reason, when the total number of granted points is 6 or more, the AT is always controlled after the bonus is over.

  Therefore, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by controlling the AT at a higher rate and determining the number of navigation stocks at a higher rate as the total number of granted points increases. As a result, the greater the total number of points recognized by the player, the greater the sense of expectation that the AT will be controlled and the acquisition of a larger number of navigation stocks, and the interest of the game will be improved. it can.

Next, a case where the bonus end time table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to in the first AT lottery will be described. If the total number of points granted during the bonus and the total number of points granted at the end of the bonus (hereinafter also referred to as the total number of bonus points granted) is “0 to 1”, the navigation stock has a ratio of 95%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the number is determined to be 0, the number of navigation stock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of bonus points awarded is “2-3”, the navigation stock number is determined to be 0 at a rate of 80%, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at a rate of 15%, and the navigation stock is a rate of 4%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the number is determined to be 3 and the navigation stock number is determined to be 5 at a rate of 1%.

  When the total number of bonus points granted is “4”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 60%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 25%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 5 at a rate of 4%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 1%.

  When the total number of bonus points given is “5”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 70%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 10%, and the number of navigation stocks is increased at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the number of navigation stock is determined to be 20 at a rate of 10%. As will be described later, the upper limit of the total number of bonus points awarded is set to “5”.

As described above, also in the bonus end time table of FIG. 57, the larger the total number of bonus points granted, the higher the percentage of navigation stock that is determined to be 1 or more, that is, the more advantageous for the player. Thus, the first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed. Further, when the total number of bonus points awarded is 5, the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 3 or more. For this reason, when the total number of bonus points awarded is 5, the AT is always controlled after the bonus is over.

  Therefore, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous for the player by controlling the AT at a higher rate and determining the higher number of navigation stocks as the bonus point total number increases. . As a result, the greater the total number of points recognized by the player, the greater the sense of expectation that the AT will be controlled and the acquisition of a larger number of navigation stocks, and the interest of the game will be improved. it can. Further, even if the total number of points recognized by the player is small, since the lottery is performed as described later and the points are notified, points that are greater than the total number of recognized points are actually given. There is a possibility that the expectation to be controlled by AT and to acquire a larger number of navigation stocks can be maintained.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG . 56 or 57 by the first AT lottery process performed when the bonus is won or the bonus is ended by the sub-control unit 91 . Is called.

  Note that the first AT lottery is not performed when a bonus is won during the penalty period in which a penalty is imposed in the penalty setting process, and when the bonus is over. That is, a penalty is imposed on the player that the number of navigation stocks cannot be obtained without performing the first AT lottery that should be executed in connection with the bonus.

The points related to the probability determined to be controlled by the AT in the first AT lottery are given and managed by the sub-control unit 91 by executing the point related processing included in the effect control processing. In addition, when the point-related processing is executed by the sub-control unit 91, a point giving effect for notifying that a point has been given is executed. FIG. 58 is a flowchart for explaining point-related processing executed by the sub-control unit 91.

First, in S1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined point grant condition is satisfied. FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram for explaining point grant conditions that can be established when the bonus is not, and FIG. 59 (b) is a diagram for explaining point grant conditions that can be established during the bonus. It is.

First, referring to FIG. 59 (a), when it is not a bonus, it is established on condition that at least one of watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2 is won, or that cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1 winning combination 1 is won. To do. More specifically, when at least one of watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2 is won in a gaming state other than a bonus, for example, winning by a predetermined lottery using a random number extracted from a random counter. As a condition, the point granting condition is satisfied. For example, the probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is set to 5% when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and is set to 10% when the gaming state is other than the normal gaming state. That is, even when at least one of watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2 is won, the points are given at a higher rate when the game state is other than the normal game state than when the game state is the normal game state. Is established. Therefore, the player is more advantageous when the player is in the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT, advantageous RT, or the like than in the normal gaming state in that the point granting condition is easily established. I can say that.

  As will be described later, a predetermined notification is provided for points awarded when a point granting condition is established by winning at least one of watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2 in a gaming state other than a bonus. Notification may be made according to the result of the lottery.

  In addition, in a game state other than the bonus, when a winning combination of cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1 winning combination 1 is made, in principle, a point granting condition is always satisfied. For this reason, in a game state other than the bonus, at least a predetermined number (for example, 1) of points to be awarded when the point granting condition is established by winning the winning combination 1 of cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1 You will be notified that points have been awarded.

Next, referring to FIG. 59 (b), in the bonus, it is established on the condition that one of the small combinations wins alone, or that one winning combination 2 is won. As shown in FIG. 53 , the bonus that can be won by the small combination alone and the bonus that can be won by the single combination 2 is only during RB1.

  When one of the small roles is won by itself during RB1, for example, the point granting condition is satisfied on the condition that it is won by a predetermined lottery using a random number extracted from a random counter. The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is set to 10%, for example.

  Note that, as will be described later, points that are awarded when any of the small roles are elected alone during RB1 and the point granting condition is satisfied can be notified according to the result of a predetermined notification lottery.

  In addition, when a single winning combination 2 is won during RB1, in principle, a point granting condition is always satisfied. As described later, at least a predetermined number (for example, 1) of points has been given to the points awarded when the point granting condition is satisfied by winning one player 2 during RB1. Is done.

In addition, when the point granting condition is always established by winning, it is not limited to notifying that a predetermined number of points have been awarded, but accurately notifying the awarded points determined in S2, which will be described later. May be.

Returning to FIG. 58 , if it is not determined in S1 that the point granting condition corresponding to the state shown in FIG. 59 is satisfied, the point-related processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1 that the point granting condition is satisfied, in S2, a grant point that can be given to the player is set.

FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining a table for determining grant points in S2. When the point granting condition is satisfied when it is other than the bonus, as shown in the non-bonus column of FIG. 60 , the point is determined to be 1 point at a rate of 50%, and to 2 points at a rate of 20% It is determined to be 3 points at a rate of 20% and 5 points at a rate of 10%.

When the point granting condition is established while the bonus is in effect, as shown in the bonus column of FIG. 60 , the point is determined to be 1 point at a rate of 85%, and 2 points at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be 3 points at a rate of 4% and 5 points at a rate of 1%.

  In this way, more points are determined as the granted points at a higher rate when the point granting condition is established during the bonus than when the point granting condition is established during the bonus.

  In addition, you may comprise so that a grant point may be determined in a different ratio according to the game state when point grant conditions are satisfied. More specifically, it may be configured such that the awarded points are determined with reference to a table corresponding to the gaming state when the point granting conditions are established. Thereby, the expectation with respect to more points being awarded can be made different depending on the gaming state when the point granting condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that a grant point may be determined in a different ratio according to the kind of winning combination used as the opportunity which point grant conditions are satisfied. More specifically, the points may be determined by referring to a table corresponding to the type of winning combination that triggered the point granting condition. Thereby, the expectation that more points will be awarded can be made different depending on the type of winning combination that triggers the point granting condition, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In S2 of FIG. 58 , a grant point is determined with reference to the table shown in FIG. 60 , and grant point information for specifying the determined grant point is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 specifies a grant point resulting from the establishment of the current point grant condition based on the grant point information in the RAM 91c.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which it is determined whether or not the point granting condition is established in S1 and the given point is determined in S2 when the condition is established is explained. The determination of the grant points is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that whether or not the points are awarded in one lottery and the grant points are determined. For example, the game state may be other than the bonus, and when the watermelon is won during the normal game state, the point 0 to 5 may be determined. In this case, when the point is determined to be 0, no point is given.

In S3, it is determined whether or not the current point grant condition that triggered the point grant is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted. That is, when the present point granting condition is other than the bonus shown in FIG. 59 (a) and is in a high probability state, the condition established by winning the cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1 winning combination 1 or FIG. 59 (b) It is determined whether any of the conditions established by winning the single winning combination 2 during the bonus shown.

  In S3, when it is determined that the point granting condition is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that a predetermined number of points have been granted. . In this embodiment, for example, the point “1” is determined as the notification point.

  On the other hand, in S3, when it is not determined that the point granting condition is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted, the determination and notification of whether or not the point has been given The process proceeds to S4 in order to make a notice lottery for determining the number of points.

  In S4, a difference number notification lottery is performed. In the difference number corresponding notification lottery, according to the difference between the total number of points actually given and the total number of notified points, the granted points set in S2 are notified when the current point grant condition is established. A lottery of whether or not to give the set points in S2 accurately, and a lottery of how many points to be notified when the set points set in S2 are not accurately reported Including. In S4, the difference number is calculated from the total number of grant points (updated in S10) and the total number of notification points (updated in S9), which will be described later. Specifically, the difference number is a value obtained by subtracting the total number of notification points from the total number of granted points.

FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a table for performing the difference number notification lottery. In the difference number corresponding notification lottery in the present embodiment, first, with reference to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 61 (a), a lottery is performed as to whether or not points are notified according to the difference number.

  When the difference number is “0”, it is determined to notify at 30% of the fact that the points have been granted in accordance with the setting of the granted points at S2, and not to notify at the rate of 70%. The When the difference number is “1”, it is determined to notify that a point has been granted in S2 at the rate of 40%, and not to be notified at a rate of 60%. The

  When the difference number is “2”, it is determined to notify the fact that the points have been provided in S2 at the rate of 50% and not to be notified at the rate of 50%. The When the difference number is “3 or more”, it is determined to notify 70% of the fact that the points have been provided in accordance with the setting of the granted points in S2, and not to notify at the rate of 30%. Is done.

In this way, the difference correspondence table A in FIG. 61 (a) is determined not to report a higher percentage as the difference number is smaller, and is reported as a higher ratio as the difference number is larger. To be decided. Thereby, when the difference number is already large, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large by not being further notified.

When it is decided to notify by referring to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 61 (a), the granted points set in S2 with reference to the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. 61 (b) . Depending on the difference, a lottery for determining whether or not to report the given point accurately and a lottery for determining the number of points to be notified when the given point is not reported correctly are performed. If the notification is not made accurately, the notification point is determined from the points that are less advantageous for the player in the production state lottery than the awarded points, that is, the points that are less than the granted points.

  When the granted point is “1”, the point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 100% as a notification point regardless of the difference number. When the granted point is “2” and the difference number is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be point “1” at a rate of 30%, and point “2” at a rate of 70%. Determined. When the granted point is “2” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be point “1” at a rate of 20%, and point “2” at a rate of 80%. To be determined.

  When the granted point is “3” and the difference is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 10%, and the point “2” at a rate of 20%. ”And the point“ 3 ”at a rate of 70%. When the granted point is “3” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be point “2” at a rate of 10%, and point “3” at a rate of 90%. To be determined.

  When the granted point is “5” and the difference number is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be “2” at a rate of 10%, and the point “3” at a rate of 20%. ”And the point“ 5 ”at a rate of 70%. When the granted point is “5” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be “3” at a rate of 10%, and the point “5” at a rate of 90%. To be determined.

In this way, in the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. 61 (b), the point to be notified is determined such that the smaller the difference number is, the higher the percentage is given than the given points. The point to be notified is determined so that the higher the difference number is, the higher the proportion is given, or the fact that a point closer to the given point is given. In addition, the more points are given, the higher the rate is. As a result, when the difference number is already large, or when a large number of given points are likely to cause the difference number, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large due to the notification of even fewer points.

In the difference number corresponding notification lottery in the present embodiment, the example of determining whether or not to notify using the tables of FIGS. 61A and 61B and the notification point has been described . Only the table of (a) may be used to determine only whether or not to notify according to the difference number, and when it is determined to notify, the grant point set in S2 may be accurately notified. Moreover, you may comprise so that an alerting | reporting point may be determined according to a difference number using only the table of FIG.61 (b).

Returning to FIG. 58 , in S5, it is determined whether or not it is determined to notify that the points have been given by the difference number corresponding notification lottery in S4. When it is determined to notify, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that the point determined in S4 has been given. On the other hand, when it is not determined to notify in S5, the process proceeds to S6.

  In S6, a total number notification lottery is performed. The total number corresponding notice lottery refers to the granted points set in S2 when the present point grant condition is satisfied according to the total number of granted points (the total number of normal granted points other than the bonus, the total number of bonus granted points during the bonus). A lottery for determining whether or not to be notified, a lottery for determining whether or not to accurately notify the grant points set in S2, and how many points are to be notified when the grant points set in S2 are not accurately reported Includes lottery. If not notified accurately, the notification point is determined from the points that are less advantageous to the player than the actual awarded points in an effect state lottery to be described later, that is, points that are less than the granted points. Note that the total number of points actually assigned is specified from the total number of granted points described later.

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a table for performing the total number notification lottery. In the total number corresponding notification lottery in the present embodiment, first, with reference to the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 62A, a lottery is performed as to whether or not points are notified according to the total number of points actually assigned. .

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “0 to 1”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that the points have been given at a rate of 80% and not to notify at a rate of 20%.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “3-5”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “2-3”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that a point has been given at a rate of 50% and not to notify at a rate of 50%.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “4 to 5”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that a point has been given at a rate of 10% and not to notify at a rate of 90%.

In this way, the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 62 (a) is determined to notify the fact that points have been granted at a higher rate as the total number of given points is smaller. The larger the number, the higher the ratio is determined not to be notified. Thereby, when only a small number of points are given, the player can be relieved to recognize that a small number of points are given by notifying at a high rate. On the other hand, by not being notified at a high rate when a large number of points are given, it is possible to increase the possibility that more points are actually given than the points recognized by the player from the notification points. , Can maintain a sense of expectation.

When it is decided to notify by referring to the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 62A , further referring to the total number correspondence table B in FIG. In accordance with the total number of points given, a lottery for determining whether or not to accurately report the given points and a lottery for determining the number of points to be notified when the given points are not reported correctly are performed. Is called.

  When the granted point is “1”, the point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 100% as a notification point regardless of the total number of given points. When the number of points given is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  When the number of points awarded is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 50%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  When the number of points awarded is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 90%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 10%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 10%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 20%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 20%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 50%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 20%.

  When the number of points given is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “3” is determined at a rate of 10%, and the point “5” is determined at a rate of 90%.

  When the number of points given is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, 10% of the points are determined as “1”, 10% of the points are determined as “2”, 30% of the points are determined as “3”, 50% of the points are determined as “5” It is determined.

  When the number of points awarded is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, , 30% of the points are determined as “1”, 30% of the points are determined as “2”, 30% of the points are determined as “3”, and 10% of the points are determined as “5”. It is determined.

In this way, the total number correspondence table B in FIG. 62 (b) is assigned so that the smaller the total number of points given, the higher the percentage of points given or points closer to the points given. The point to be notified is determined so that the fact that a smaller number of points than the granted points are given at a higher rate is notified as the total number of the given points is larger. Thereby, when only a small number of points are given, it is possible to reassure the player by recognizing that a small number of points are given by accurately informing at a high rate. On the other hand, when a large number of points are given, a point that is less than the given points is notified at a high rate, so that more points are actually given than the points recognized by the player from the notification points. Can increase the possibility of being in the future, and can sustain expectations.

In the total number corresponding notification lottery in the present embodiment, the example of determining whether or not to notify using the tables of FIGS. 62A and 62B and the notification point has been described . It may be configured to determine only whether or not to notify in accordance with the total number using only the table of a), and to accurately notify the grant points set in S2 when it is determined to notify. Moreover, you may comprise so that an alerting | reporting point may be determined according to the total number using only the table of FIG.62 (b).

  Moreover, although the example which performs the difference number corresponding | compatible notification lottery and the total number corresponding | compatible notification lottery was demonstrated as the notification lottery in a present Example, you may comprise not only this but only any one. Further, the example of performing the total number corresponding notification lottery after performing the difference number corresponding notification lottery has been described, but the difference number corresponding notification lottery may be performed after performing the total number corresponding notification lottery.

  Moreover, in the notification lottery in the present embodiment, the example of determining whether to notify and the notification point according to the difference number or the total number has been described, but not limited to this, in the notification lottery, the difference number or the total number is determined. Regardless, it may be configured to determine whether or not to notify and the notification point according to the grant point set in S2.

Returning to FIG. 58 , in S <b> 7, it is determined whether or not it is determined to notify that the points have been awarded by the total number corresponding notification lottery of S <b> 6. When it is determined to notify, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that the point determined in S6 has been given. On the other hand, when it is not determined to notify in S7, it transfers to S10, without performing the process for alert | reporting that the point was provided.

  In S8, the notification process for performing the point provision effect which alert | reports that the point was provided is performed. In the notification process, when it is determined YES in S3, for example, information that can specify that point “1” has been given is notified as a point granting effect (at the start or end of the game, “Acquire Point 1! To display a message such as “!”. Further, in the notification process, information that can specify that the point determined in S4 or S6 is given as a point granting effect is notified (for example, when the fact that the point “2” is given is notified). Then, a process for displaying a message such as “acquire point 2!” At the start or end of the game is performed.

  The point giving effect is not limited to the one executed in the above-described manner, and may be executed in any manner as long as the effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the number of points given. .

  In S9, the notification point total number information for specifying the total number of notification points, which is the total number of points notified to the player by the process of S8, is updated. In addition, as the point granting effect notified in S8, information for specifying the total number of notification points (for example, a message such as “total number of acquired points 5!”) May be notified.

  The notification point total number information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and is added and updated for each point every time it is notified in S8 that a point has been given. Note that the notification point total number information is reset by winning a bonus or by determining to control the effect state to the AT mode.

  In S10, the total granted point information for specifying the total number of granted points, which is the total number of points actually given by the process of S2, is updated. The granted point total number information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and is added and updated for the given points after the given points are set in S2 and a notification lottery is performed.

  The total number of granted points in the present embodiment is reset when a bonus is won and an effect state lottery is performed, or when it is determined to control the effect state to AT. It should be noted that the total number of granted points information is not limited to the fact that the bonus is won and the production state lottery is performed, or the fact that the decision is made to control the production state to the AT, and the bonus state and the production state lottery Alternatively, a predetermined number of points (for example, 2 points) out of the total number of granted points may be carried over even after the determination has been made or after it has been decided to control the performance state to AT.

  In this embodiment, as the upper limit of the total number of granted points, “10” is set in advance except during the bonus, and “5” is set in advance during the bonus. For this reason, when the granted points set in S2 are added to the total number of granted points until the current point grant condition is satisfied, the upper limit is set as the total number of granted points when the above-described upper limit is exceeded. Accordingly, as the upper limit of the total number of notification points, “10” is set in advance except for the bonus, and “5” is set in advance during the bonus. For this reason, in S8, when the point determined by the notification lottery or the like is notified, it is notified from the relationship with the total number of notification points that if the above-described upper limit value is exceeded, the point that becomes the upper limit value is given. The

  When the total number of notification points is already the upper limit value, notification is not performed in the same manner as when no points are given. Therefore, after the granted points are set in S2, if the total number of notification points is already the upper limit value, the point-related process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to S3 only when the total number of notification points is less than the upper limit value. You may comprise.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the point granting condition is satisfied, whether or not to report is determined according to the difference number or the total number of points actually allocated, and the notification point for notification is determined. And notified according to the determination result. In addition, the notification point is determined from the point where the degree of advantage is lower for the player in the performance state lottery than the actually granted point. For this reason, the points recognized by the player from the notification points are equal to or less than the total number of points actually given. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the total number of points actually granted may be greater than the total number of points specified from the notification points, and the total number of points specified from the notification points. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater expectation to the player to be determined to be in an advantageous production state in the production state lottery.

  Note that the point-related process is not executed during a penalty period in which a penalty is imposed in the penalty setting process. That is, a penalty is imposed on the player that points cannot be obtained even when the point granting condition is satisfied. Therefore, in principle, points are not awarded during the penalty period even if the winning combination is Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 + 1, which is always awarded points. In addition, as a penalty regarding points, the granted point total number information may be reset.

Next, the second AT lottery will be described. The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the second AT lottery by executing the second AT lottery process included in the AT control process. In the second AT lottery process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied based on a command from the main control unit 41, and the second AT lottery is executed when the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining lottery conditions that trigger the execution of the second AT lottery. FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining a table referred to in the second AT lottery.

As shown in the column of the normal game state in FIG. 63 , when the current game state is the normal game state, the lottery condition is established by winning the bonus regardless of whether or not the effect state is AT. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the 2AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 64 (a). The sub-control unit 91 specifies the current gaming state based on, for example, a gaming state command from the main control unit 41, and specifies that a bonus has been won based on an internal winning command from the main control unit 41.

When the table shown in FIG. 64 (a) is referenced, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 50%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 40%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 10%. Is determined to be 3, 3% of Navistock is determined to be 7%, Navistock is determined to be 10% of 2%, and Navistock is determined to be 20% of 1% A second AT lottery is performed.

  After the bonus is over, not only the number of navigation stocks determined in the 2nd AT lottery but also the number of navigation stocks determined in the 1st AT lottery based on the bonus winning and the navigation stock determined in the 1st AT lottery after the bonus ends. The AT is controlled according to the total number with the number. Note that an upper limit number (for example, 20) may be provided for the total number of navigation stocks, and the upper limit number may be set when the total number is equal to or greater than the upper limit number.

In addition, when in the preparation mode or disadvantaged RT, as shown in the column of preparation mode / disadvantage RT in FIG. 63 , lottery conditions are satisfied every time 5 games are consumed or until bonus is won. To do. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the 2AT lottery is performed by referring to a table corresponding to enacted drawing condition of the table shown in FIG. 64 (b).

In the second AT lottery process, in order to identify the number of games that have been consumed after being controlled in the preparation mode, for example, every time a game state command is received from the main control unit 41 after being controlled in the preparation mode, a predetermined counter Is counted up. The main control unit 41, from the value of the counter, specifying the number of games digested from being controlled in the preparation mode, when a lottery number satisfying game shown in FIG. 63, the 2AT lottery is executed. For example, when the fifth game is finished after being controlled in the preparation mode, it is determined that five games have been consumed, and the second AT lottery is executed. It should be noted that the value of the predetermined counter is reset by reaching 30, winning a fall replay, winning a bonus, or the like.

When it is determined that 5 games have been consumed after being controlled in the preparation mode, with reference to the table at the time of 5G digestion shown in FIG. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at the ratio.

Further, when it is determined that 10 games have been digested after 5 games have been digested and controlled to the preparation mode, Navistock is referenced at a rate of 98% with reference to the 10G digest table shown in FIG. 64 (b) . The second AT lottery is performed so that the number is determined to be 0 and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 2%.

Further, when it is determined that a total of 15 games have been consumed after 5 games have been consumed and the preparation mode has been controlled (in this embodiment, 10 games have passed since the preparation mode has been controlled, so that the disadvantageous RT is entered since the transition to the disadvantaged RT takes place). (It can also be said that it has been determined that 5 games have been digested since the time of control), with reference to the table at the time of 15G digestion shown in FIG. The second AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at a rate of 5%.

Furthermore, when it is determined that a total of 20 games have been consumed after further 5 games have been consumed and the preparation mode has been controlled (when it has been determined that 10 games have been consumed since the disadvantaged RT was controlled), FIG. ), The Navistock number is determined to be 0 at 90%, the Navistock number is determined to be 1 at 7%, and the Navistock number is determined at 2%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 1%.

Further, when it is determined that 25 games have been consumed after the further 5 games have been consumed and the preparation mode has been controlled (when it has been determined that 15 games have been consumed since the disadvantaged RT control), FIG. ), The Navistock number is determined to be 0 at a rate of 70%, the Navistock number is determined to be 1 at a rate of 20%, and the Navistock number is determined at a rate of 5%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 2%.

Further, when it is determined that 30 games have been consumed after 5 games have been consumed and the preparation mode has been controlled (when it has been determined that 20 games have been consumed since the disadvantaged RT control), FIG. ), The number of Navistock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 60%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 25%, and the number of Navistock is determined at a rate of 10%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 2%. When the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table at the time of 30G digestion shown in FIG. 64 (b), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more. Become.

When a bonus is won in the preparation mode or disadvantaged RT, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30% with reference to the bonus winning table shown in FIG. The number of stocks is determined as 3, the number of Navistock is determined as 5 at a rate of 20%, the number of Navistock is determined as 10 at the rate of 10%, and the number of Navistock is determined as 20 at the rate of 5% As described above, the second AT lottery is performed. When the second AT lottery is made with reference to the bonus winning table shown in FIG. 64 (b), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more. Become.

Further, when it is advantageous RT, as shown in the advantageous RT column in FIG. 63 , the lottery condition is established by winning the bonus. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the 2AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 64 (c).

When the table shown in FIG. 64 (c) is referenced, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 60%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 25%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 10%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 2%.

When the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 64 (c), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more, and therefore the AT is always controlled.

  Here, the degree of advantage for the player in the second AT lottery executed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the preparation mode, the disadvantaged RT, and the advantageous RT are compared. The degree of advantage for the player is, for example, the ratio that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more in the AT lottery, that is, the ratio that is controlled by the AT, and the ratio that is determined to be a larger number of navigation stocks in the AT lottery. And so on.

First, when the lottery conditions are satisfied by winning the bonus, in the second AT lottery executed in the normal gaming state, the table shown in FIG. 64 (a) is referred to, and the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT or advantageous RT In the second AT lottery executed at the time, the table shown in FIG. 64 (b) or the table shown in FIG. 64 (c) when winning the bonus is referred. For this reason, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more at a higher rate in the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT or advantageous RT than in the normal gaming state, and the number of navigation stocks is increased at a higher rate. It is determined. In other words, in the preparation mode, disadvantaged RT, or advantageous RT, it is advantageous for the player by being controlled by the AT at a higher rate and determined by a higher number of navigation stocks than at the normal gaming state. It can be said that an AT lottery will be performed. As a result, in the preparation mode, disadvantaged RT, or advantageous RT, it is possible to have a sense of expectation to be controlled by the AT and to acquire a larger number of navigation stocks than in the normal gaming state. , You can improve the fun of the game. In particular, in the preparation mode and disadvantaged RT, after the bonus ends, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 or more at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state, and the navigation stock number is determined to be higher at a higher rate. , Because it is possible to acquire the number of navigation stock under advantageous conditions even if the preparation mode and disadvantageous RT that can not be shifted to the normal gaming state that can be shifted to advantageous RT that is advantageous for the player continues, A player's dissatisfaction which cannot be changed to a gaming state can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the preparation mode and disadvantaged RT, the table for 5G to 30G digestion shown in FIG. 64 (b) is referred to every time 5 games are digested until 30 games are exhausted without winning a bonus. 2AT lottery. For this reason, in the preparation mode and the disadvantageous RT, the AT is controlled at a higher rate than at least in the normal gaming state. In the preparation mode and disadvantaged RT, as described above, by winning a bonus, the AT is controlled at a higher rate than at the time of at least the normal gaming state, and a higher number of navigation stocks is determined at a higher rate. By doing so, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. As a result, in the preparation mode and disadvantageous RT, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for being controlled by the AT, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in the preparation mode and disadvantageous RT, as shown in the table at the time of 5G-30G digestion in FIG. 64 (b), in proportion to the number of digested games, the ratio controlled by AT and the number of navigation stocks are larger. The winning rate is set so that each determined ratio is high. In particular, when 30 games are consumed, as a rule, navigation stock is always acquired. As a result, in the preparation mode and the disadvantaged RT, the expectation that the preparation mode and the disadvantageous RT that follows the game will be maintained and the game will be digested as many times as possible without stopping the special line without dropping the grapes. Can improve the fun of the game.

Further, in the second AT lottery executed by winning a bonus in the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT or advantageous RT, the bonus winning table in FIG. a table shown in FIG. 64 (c) is referred to when an RT. Therefore, in either the preparation mode or the advantageous RT, the navigation stock is always acquired after the bonus is won by winning the bonus. However, the percentage in the preparation mode or the disadvantaged RT is higher than that in the advantageous RT. A larger number of navigation stocks is determined. In other words, in the preparation mode and disadvantaged RT, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by determining a higher number of navigation stocks at a higher rate than in the advantageous RT. As a result, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for winning a bonus in the preparation mode and disadvantaged RT, that is, winning a bonus at an early stage as much as possible, and improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the lottery condition determined according to the current gaming state is satisfied by the second AT lottery process performed by the sub-control unit 91, and the lottery condition is satisfied. Then, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the corresponding table shown in FIG .

  Note that the second AT lottery is not performed during the penalty period in which a penalty is imposed in the penalty setting process. That is, a penalty is imposed on the player that the second AT lottery is not performed and the number of navigation stocks cannot be obtained even if the predetermined game is consumed in the bonus winning or preparation mode and disadvantaged RT. Further, when it is a penalty RT, a penalty that the second AT lottery is not performed is imposed on the player.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 in this embodiment performs AT management processing included in the AT control processing in the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT, or advantageous RT, thereby setting the AT set according to the AT lottery result. Based on the flag, the control to the AT is managed.

  Specifically, when the control from the preparation mode or the disadvantageous RT to the normal gaming state is started, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT when the AT flag is specified as AT. In other words, when the navigation stock from before the bonus winning remains, when the AT is determined to be controlled by the result of the AT lottery by the bonus winning or bonus end, and the AT lottery for every five games in the preparation mode and disadvantaged RT When it is determined to be controlled by the AT according to the result, the control is performed by the AT when the control from the preparation mode or the disadvantageous RT to the normal gaming state is started. In the normal gaming state, the navigation effect can be executed under the control of the AT without consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks. In the normal gaming state, when the AT is controlled, when a penalty replay is won and the penalty RT is controlled, a process of terminating the AT is performed.

  When controlled by the AT and controlled from the normal gaming state to the advantageous RT, the navigation stock number is consumed (subtracted) by 1 point, so that the ART is used for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50) while the game is consumed. To control. When 1 point is consumed for the number of navigation stocks, the AT flag is updated to indicate the number of navigation stocks subtracted by 1.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing to count the number of games that have been digested when it is an ART, and control it to a non-ART when a predetermined number of times is reached. At this time, if the number of navigation stocks indicated by the AT flag is 0, it is updated to the AT flag indicating that it is not AT.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing to determine whether or not a fall replay or a grape has been won when it is non-ART. Then, when it is determined that the player has won the fall replay or the grape, and the AT flag indicates that it is AT, the navigation stock number is consumed by 1 point, so that the game is again put into the ART for a predetermined number of times. Control. Thereby, since the navigation effect is executed, it is possible to avoid the fall replay prize winning intentionally or to win the grape. On the other hand, when a fall replay or a grape is won and the AT flag specifies that it is not AT, it is not controlled by ART and no navigation effect is executed. For this reason, possibility that it will be controlled to a normal game state increases.

  As described above, in the case of advantageous RT, the navigation stock number is consumed by 1 point, so that the game is controlled to ART during the predetermined number of game digests. Also, even when the game is digested a predetermined number of times in ART and is once controlled to be non-ART, the fall replay is performed on condition that the AT flag is still specified and the number of navigation stocks is 1 or more. Alternatively, the ART is controlled again while the game is digested a predetermined number of times from the time of winning the grape. Thereby, it can be said that it becomes controllable by ART over the period according to the number of navigation stocks set according to the result of AT lottery. Further, it can be said that the ART can be repeatedly controlled by the number of times corresponding to the number of navigation stocks set according to the AT lottery result.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the above-mentioned number of navigation stocks is not acquired, the number of games digested by non-AT since the end of the previous bonus is the predetermined number of ceiling games (for example, 500 games). When it reaches, the AT is controlled until the next bonus is won. The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs processing for controlling the AT when the number of ceiling games is reached by executing the ceiling game arrival time processing included in the AT control processing.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart for explaining a ceiling game arrival process for performing AT control when the ceiling game is reached. The ceiling game arrival process is executed in association with one game, and is executed, for example, when one game is started or when one game ends.

  In S21, it is determined whether or not the performance state is non-AT. When it is determined in S21 that it is non-AT, it is determined in S22 whether or not it is during the penalty period set in the penalty setting process.

  If it is determined in S22 that the penalty period is not in effect, 1 is added to the non-AT game number counter for specifying the number of games that have been consumed during non-AT since the end of the previous bonus in S23. The non-AT game number counter is updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c.

  In S24, it is determined whether or not the value of the non-AT game number counter added in S23 has reached a predetermined number of ceiling games (for example, 500). If it is determined in S24 that the number of ceiling games has been reached, it is determined in S25 whether or not a penalty RT is being performed.

  If it is determined in S25 that the penalty RT is not in progress, an AT setting for controlling the effect state to AT is performed in S26 until the next bonus is generated. For example, a forced AT flag for controlling the AT is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c to forcibly control the AT. This forced AT flag is cleared when a bonus is generated. Thereby, when the number of games digested during non-AT reaches the number of ceiling games, it is possible to control the AT until the next bonus occurs.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the penalty period is in S22, when it is determined that the number of ceiling games has not been reached in S24, or when it is determined that a penalty RT is determined in S25, the process for reaching the ceiling game is performed as it is. Exit. Thereby, during the penalty period, the non-AT game number counter is not added in relation to one game. In other words, during the penalty period, even if the game is consumed during non-AT, a penalty is imposed on the player that it is not added as the number of games for determining whether or not the ceiling game number has been reached. be able to. Further, even if the number of ceiling games is reached during the penalty RT, a disadvantage can be imposed on the player that the AT is not controlled until the penalty RT is over.

  Instead of the processing of S25, it is determined in S22 whether or not it is in the penalty period and whether or not it is in the penalty RT, and if it is determined that it is in the penalty period or in the penalty RT, The process when reaching the ceiling game may be terminated without adding the AT game number counter. As a result, it is possible to pose a risk that the non-AT game number counter is not added during the penalty RT as well as during the penalty period.

  Also, in this embodiment, even when not controlled by the AT, when winning a simultaneous winning combination that can be won simultaneously with a bonus, during a predetermined game, a navigation enabling period during which a navigation effect can be executed Be controlled. The sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs a process for controlling to a navigable period when winning a simultaneous winning combination by executing a navigable period setting process included in the AT control process.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart for explaining a navigable period setting process for executing a navigation effect during non-AT. The navigable period setting process is executed in association with one game, and is executed, for example, when one game is started or when one game ends.

  In S31, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is other than the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT, and penalty RT, and the effect state is non-AT. When it is determined in S31 that the mode is other than the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT and penalty RT and is not in AT, it is determined whether or not the simultaneous winning combination (Cherry 1, Cherry 2) is won in the internal lottery of the current game. The game this time refers to a game that has started or ended. If it is determined in S31 that it is a preparation mode, a disadvantaged RT, a penalty RT, or not in non-AT, and if it is determined in S32 that the simultaneous winning combination is not won, the navigation is possible. Terminate the period setting process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S32 that the simultaneous winning combination is won, it is determined in S33 whether or not the bonus is actually simultaneously won. That is, it is determined whether or not one of BB1 + cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1 winning combination 1, BB2 + cherry 1 + cherry 2 and BB3 + cherry 1 is won. In S33, it is not limited to determining whether or not the bonus is actually won at the same time. For example, a bonus that was won before the previous game may be carried over. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  When it is determined YES in S33, a special navigation period is set in S34, and the navigable period setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined NO in S33, the normal navigation period is set in S35, and the navigable period setting process is ended.

  When the special navigation period is set in S34, for example, when the winning combination is selected from the next game for a special navigation period (for example, a period during which five games are consumed), the corresponding navigation effect is displayed in the special navigation period. It is executed according to the probability for the period (eg 90%). On the other hand, when the normal navigation period is set in S35, for example, when the winning combination for the navigation target is won over the period for the normal navigation period from the next game (for example, a period during which three games are consumed), a corresponding navigation effect is provided. It is executed according to the probability (for example, 50%) for the normal navigation period.

  In this embodiment, an example in which the period for the special navigation period is set longer than the period for the normal navigation period will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be set shorter than the normal navigation period.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the probability for the special navigation period when the navigation target role is won during the special navigation period is executed when the navigation target role is won during the normal navigation period. The example is set higher than the probability for the normal navigation period, but not limited to this, it may be the same as the probability for the normal navigation period, or set lower than the probability for the normal navigation period It may be what is being done.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the special navigation period and the normal navigation period will be described with respect to an example of counting from the next game. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be calculated after a predetermined number of games have been consumed. The game may be calculated from the game won for the navigation target role.

  In this embodiment, an example will be described in which a special navigation period is set when it is determined that a bonus is won in S33, and a normal navigation period is set when it is determined that a bonus is not won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the navigable period may be set at a different rate depending on whether or not a bonus is won. For example, when the bonus is won, the special navigation period may be set at a higher rate than when the bonus is not won. When the bonus is not won, the normal navigation period may be set at a higher rate than when the bonus is won.

  In addition, when the game is started, the sub control unit 91 in this embodiment performs a navigation effect execution process included in the game effect execution process, thereby executing a navigation effect according to the result of the internal winning of the game. Is done. The result of the internal winning is specified from the internal winning command from the main control unit 41.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart for explaining a navigation effect execution process for executing a navigation effect according to the effect state.

  In S41, it is determined whether or not the effect state is AT. If it is determined in S41 that the vehicle is in the AT state, it is determined in S42 whether or not the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state has been won. The navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state refers to promotion replay and penalty replay when in the normal gaming state, and grape + small role and fall replay when in advantageous RT.

  If it is not determined in S42 that the winning combination corresponding to the game state has been won, the navigation effect execution process is terminated without executing the navigation effect. On the other hand, when it is determined in S42 that the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state is won, the navigation effect corresponding to the selected navigation target combination is executed in S43, and the navigation effect execution process is terminated.

  As a navigation effect when winning a promotion replay and a penalty replay, a push order for winning the promotion replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “Middle press!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the Lip GR1. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the Lip GR2, a message such as “Right press!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In addition, as a navigation effect when winning a grape + small combination, a push order for reliably winning any one of grapes 1 to 8 is notified. For example, when winning the left-pressed grape 1, any of the grapes 1 to 8 can be reliably won as an advantageous symbol combination by first stopping the left reel, so the left reel is first stopped. A message such as “Press left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, when the middle pressed grape 1 is won, any one of the grapes 1 to 8 can be surely won as an advantageous symbol combination by first stopping the middle reel, so that the middle reel is first stopped. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when winning a fall replay, a push order for avoiding a fall replay winning is notified according to the winning situation. For example, a message such as “Left press!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the Lip GR3. In addition, as a navigation effect when the Lip GR4 is won, a message such as “Right press!” Or “Center press!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for reverse pressing or middle pressing.

  As described above, in the navigation effect in the present embodiment, a message reminiscent of an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified in the same mode regardless of the type of the navigation target role. For this reason, the player can operate in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player without being conscious of the type of the winning navigation target combination.

  In addition, the aspect of a navigation effect is not restricted to such an aspect, What kind of thing may be sufficient if a player is distinguishable according to a winning condition. In addition, the navigation effect is not limited to what is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

On the other hand, in S41, when it is determined not to be in the AT, whether navigation period during set step S34 or S35 in FIG. 66 is determined at S44. If it is not determined in S44 that the navigation is possible, the navigation effect execution process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S44 that the navigation is possible, it is determined in S45 whether or not the navigation target combination corresponding to the above gaming state has been won.

  As a navigation target role in the navigable period, promotion replay and penalty replay, grape + small role are defined when in normal gaming state, and fall replay, grape + small role are defined when advantageous RT, When it is a penalty RT, grape + small role is defined.

  Also, during the navigable period in the internal RT, when promotion replay and penalty replay are won, a navigation effect is performed to win the promotion replay only once, and thereafter navigation for normal replay winning is performed. Production is performed. As a result, during the navigation period, regardless of whether the bonus is won or not, a navigation effect is executed to win the promotion replay only once, otherwise the normal replay and grape + small role are won. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether or not a bonus has been won based on the type of navigation effect and the stop appearance.

  When it is determined in S45 that the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state is won, the navigation effect is executed according to the probability determined according to whether the navigable period is the special navigation period or the normal navigation period in S46. It is determined whether or not to execute, and when it is determined to be executed, the navigation effect corresponding to the winning navigation target combination is executed, and the navigation effect execution process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S45 that the winning combination corresponding to the gaming state has not been won, a single win is selected for the normal replay in S47 (except for the case of winning simultaneously with other replays) or a single win for the grapes (Grape 1 It is determined whether or not it has been won by -8, except when winning the same time as a small role. If it is determined in S47 that the normal replay has not been won alone or the grape has not been won alone, the navigation effect execution process is terminated. When it is determined in S47 that the normal replay has been won alone or the grape has been won alone, the process proceeds to S48 and a special navigation effect is executed.

  The special navigation effect refers to, for example, a navigation effect that is executed when a winning combination in which one symbol combination is stopped regardless of the operation mode is won. As the special navigation effect, a navigation effect in the same manner as the navigation effect when the promotion replay is won is executed. For example, a random number or the like may be used to display a message such as “middle press!” As a navigation effect when winning the Lip GR1 or a message “press right” as a navigation effect when winning the Lip GR2. The selected message is randomly selected, and the selected message is executed as a special navigation effect. As a result, the same navigation effect as when the promotion replay is won is executed, and the same symbol combination is stopped regardless of the operation mode even though the stop operation is performed according to the navigation effect. Can be recognized, and can give a sense of tension to whether the bonus is won or not.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the navigation effect based on the command from the main control unit 41, thereby performing the navigation effect when controlled by the AT and during the navigable period.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs a penalty setting process so as to impose a penalty on the condition that the operation is not performed in the recommended pressing order when the navigation effect is not executed. .

FIG. 68 is a flowchart for explaining penalty setting processing. In this embodiment, the penalty setting process is described as being executed when one game is finished. However, the penalty setting process may be executed at a timing at which it can be specified whether or not the accepted operation mode is a common operation mode. For example, it may be executed when the second stop is performed.

  In S51, it is determined whether or not a navigation effect is executed in the finished game. If it is determined in S51 that the navigation effect has been executed, the penalty setting process is terminated without any penalty. Therefore, no penalty is imposed when a navigation effect is performed during an AT or a navigable period, so the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the navigation effect is not being executed in the finished game, it is determined in S52 whether or not an irregular pressing, which is an operation mode other than the common operation mode, has been performed. Here, the irregular pressing means the above-described middle pressing or right pressing.

  If it is determined in S52 that the irregular pressing has not been performed, the penalty setting process is terminated without any penalty. For this reason, even when the navigation effect is not executed, no penalty is imposed as long as the operations are performed in a common operation mode.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the irregular pressing has been performed, a penalty lottery process is performed in S53. Penalty lottery processing refers to processing for randomly determining the degree of penalty imposed on a player using a random number or the like. In the penalty lottery process in the present embodiment, it is determined as either a high penalty or a low penalty. In the penalty lottery process, when a high penalty is determined, 100 is added to the number of penalty games in S54, and when a low penalty is determined, 50 is added to the number of penalty games in S55. The number of penalty games is the number of games for which a penalty is imposed and indicates the length of the penalty period. The penalty game number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and 1 is subtracted every time one game is consumed. The number of penalty games is reset by winning the bonus or winning the number of games.

  In S56, a warning is displayed in order to operate in a common operation mode when the irregular pressing is performed. As the warning display, for example, it is informed that a penalty such as “Penalty 100 game” has been imposed, and that it is recommended that an operation in a common operation mode such as “Let's press left!” Is recommended.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs a game state effect execution process, thereby displaying a game state effect related to the current game state or effect state by the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53, 54. , Using electrical components such as reel LED 55.

  As the gaming state effect, for example, when it is in the normal gaming state, and when it is in the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT or advantageous RT and not in AT, the normal effect (for example, “Normally!” On the liquid crystal display 51). Display a message). When the preparation mode, disadvantageous RT or advantageous RT is in the AT state, a special effect (for example, a message such as “AT in progress!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51) is performed.

  In addition, when it is a navigable period, the probability of winning a replay in which the pull-in control is performed with priority over the bonus as described above increases. In other words, when the bonus is won during the navigable period, it is controlled to the internal RT so that the winning probability of replay is improved. In addition, when the bonus is not won during the navigable period, the probability of winning the promotion replay is increased because the navigation effect is executed when the promotion replay is won in the normal gaming state, and as a result, the winning probability of the replay is improved. It becomes easy to be controlled by RT. In addition, during the navigable period, since the navigation effect is also performed when winning a small role or the like where the pull-in control is performed with priority over the bonus as described above, the probability of winning a grape is improved. Therefore, even if a bonus is won, it is difficult to win the winning bonus during the navigable period.

  In the present embodiment, using the navigable period during which it is difficult to win a bonus as described above, the player can win that the bonus is won while being controlled during the navigable period. Production is performed. That is, when it is a navigable period, a continuous effect for notifying information related to whether or not a bonus is won is performed as a game state effect. The continuous effect is an effect of performing a bonus winning notification for notifying the presence / absence and type of a bonus winning as the ending of the story after performing an effect of developing a series of stories over a navigable period. As a result, even if a bonus is won during the navigable period, it is difficult to win the bonus due to the above-mentioned reason, so it is sure that the bonus may be won over the navigable period. Can improve the interest of the game.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when in the normal gaming state, as long as it is operated in a common operation mode, it is not controlled to the advantageous RT, but is not controlled to the penalty RT. Will continue. On the other hand, if it is in the normal gaming state, if it is operated in an operation mode different from the common operation mode, there is a possibility that it will win the promotion replay and be controlled to advantageous RT, but it will be controlled to penalty RT by winning the penalty replay There is also a possibility of being done. Moreover, the operation mode for winning the promotion replay is the same as any one of the operation modes for winning the penalty replay. For this reason, when the navigation effect is not being executed, it is impossible to operate in an operation mode for intentionally winning a promotion replay. For this reason, when in the normal gaming state and the navigation effect is not executed, there is a risk that if it is operated in an operation mode other than the common operation mode, it may be controlled by the penalty RT. As a result, when the game is in the normal game state and the navigation effect is not executed, the player can be prevented from operating in an operation mode other than the common operation mode, and the normal game state is substantially continued. Can do. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust that the advantageous RT is not controlled despite winning the promotion replay.

  In addition, when the navigation effect is not performed in the normal gaming state, if an operation is performed with an irregular push, the penalty RT is controlled with a probability of 50% when the player wins Lip GR1 or Lip GR2, and the bonus is won or 300 The penalty RT is continued until the game is exhausted. During that time, the penalty RT is not controlled and even if the ceiling game is reached, the penalty RT is not controlled. On the other hand, even if the promotion replay can be won by chance with the remaining 50% probability and controlled to the advantageous RT, the navigation effect is not executed in the advantageous RT. For this reason, when winning a winning combination including a small role, since it cannot be operated in an operation mode that intentionally avoids a fall replay winning a prize or a special exit stop, only about 7 games can continue the advantageous RT. Can not fall to the normal gaming state. In this way, when the navigation effect is not executed in the normal gaming state, there is a disadvantage of being penalized that the penalty can be controlled rather than the profit by operating in an operation mode other than the common operation mode. Will be bigger. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage for the player by operating in a common operation mode rather than operating in an operation mode other than the common operation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation in the operation mode other than the common operation mode only when the navigation effect is being executed in the normal gaming state.

  As a result, the advantageous RT can be controlled only when the navigation effect is being executed in the normal gaming state, and the advantage of the advantageous RT can be maintained. As a result, the entertainment of the game can be improved by executing the navigation effect and controlling the advantageous RT.

  In addition, during the AT, since the navigation effect is executed when the promotion replay is won, the operation is controlled in an advantageous manner by operating in the operation mode for winning the promotion replay while intentionally avoiding the penalty replay winning. And in that case there will be no penalty. In addition, since the AT continues even in the advantageous RT, the navigation effect is notified when the winning combination including the small role is won, so the operation is performed in an operation mode that intentionally avoids the fall replay winning and the special exit stop. Thus, the advantageous RT can be maintained.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the navigation effect is not executed, if it is operated in an operation mode (middle press or right press) other than the common operation mode, not only the penalty RT but also the penalty period is controlled. During the penalty period, even if the first AT lottery condition or the second AT lottery condition is satisfied, the AT lottery is not performed and no navigation stock is given. For this reason, in the normal gaming state and non-AT, it is possible to more effectively prevent the operation by irregular pressing.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the advantageous RT is controlled, the navigation effect is executed in the advantageous RT only when the navigation effect is performed in the previous normal gaming state. For this reason, when the navigation effect is not performed in the normal gaming state, even if it is controlled to the advantageous RT, the possibility of winning the fall replay is increased and it becomes easy to be controlled to the normal gaming state. It is possible to increase the risk that occurs to the player by operating in an operation mode other than the common operation mode when the navigation effect is not executed in the normal game state while preventing the occurrence of inconvenience.

  Further, in this embodiment, once controlled to the penalty RT, it is not controlled to the advantageous RT unless the penalty RT is terminated and controlled to the normal gaming state. Can be increased.

Further, when an operation is performed with an irregular push in a game in which no navigation effect is executed, a warning is displayed as shown at S56 in FIG. 68 , so that an operation with an irregular push can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 52 , in the process until it is controlled to advantageous RT, it is controlled to the normal gaming state by stopping the special event derived at the time of losing grapes in the preparation mode or disadvantaged RT on the winning line. To be included. For this reason, since the difficulty of being controlled to advantageous RT increases, the value and advantage of advantageous RT can be raised further. In addition, special events can be stopped on the winning line on the condition that the stop operation is performed in a common operation mode without penalties, and the normal game state in the preparation mode or disadvantaged RT Since the operation mode for stopping the special event to be transferred to the winning line is the same as the common operation mode without penalty, it is controlled by the AT in the preparation mode, the disadvantaged RT and the normal gaming state. There is no need to use different operation modes in the case where the player is not, and there is no confusion for the player.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the special outcome is a configuration that can be stopped on the winning line on the condition that the stop operation is performed in a common operation mode in which no penalty is imposed. Even if a stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation mode, the special event will not stop on the winning line, and the stop operation in the common operation mode can be made thorough. Other than the common operation mode by mistake It is possible to prevent a penalty from being imposed due to the stop operation in the operation mode. Furthermore, in a game other than a game where a navigation effect is performed in a gaming state other than the bonus, a penalty is imposed by always performing a stop operation in an operation mode other than the common operation mode, and thus a more common The stop operation in the operation mode can be made thorough.

  In addition, when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the common operation mode as long as it is configured to be able to stop on the winning line by performing the stop operation in at least the common operation mode, In this case, the penalty may be imposed on the operation mode for stopping the special game that is shifted to the normal gaming state in the preparation mode or disadvantaged RT. It is the same as the common operation mode that is not performed, and it is not necessary to use the operation mode separately in the preparation mode and disadvantageous RT and when not controlled by the AT in the normal gaming state, There will be no confusion.

  Further, even when the navigation stock is given at the end of the bonus and it is determined that the control is performed by the AT thereafter, the control is not controlled by the AT in the preparation mode and the disadvantaged RT. For this reason, after the bonus is over, the AT is not controlled until the normal gaming state is entered, and the advantage by the bonus and the advantage by the AT are not continuously provided, and the gambling is extremely extreme. Can be prevented from increasing.

  Also, as in this example, the special game stops on the winning line by missing the winning combination of grape + winning combination that is the target of navigation production. In the configuration for shifting to the state, it is possible to prevent the transition to the normal gaming state from being delayed more than necessary by not being controlled by the AT in the preparation mode and the disadvantageous RT.

The AT is controlled by being determined as one or more navigation stocks in the AT lottery such as the first AT lottery shown in FIGS . 55 to 57 and the second AT lottery shown in FIGS. 63 and 64. .

Further, among the AT lotteries, the first AT lottery is performed at the time of bonus winning and at the end of the bonus as shown in FIG . In the 1st AT lottery performed at the time of winning the bonus, according to the total number of granted points given other than the bonus, the higher the total number of granted points, the higher the ratio is determined to be 1 or more and a larger number of navigation stocks. The lottery will be drawn according to the winning rate. In addition, in the first AT lottery performed at the end of the bonus, according to the total number of granted points given during the bonus, the larger the total number of granted points, the higher the number of navigation stocks that is 1 or more is determined to be higher. The lottery will be drawn according to the winning rate specified in. Therefore, the player is given more points so that the first AT lottery is performed according to the winning rate determined to be determined to be a higher number of navigation stocks of 1 or more at a higher rate. It can make you expect.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 58 , on the condition that the point granting condition is established and the point is granted, the point granting effect for notifying that the point has been granted in S8 is performed. The notification process is performed. This notification process is based on S3~S6 the processing result of FIG. 58, S2 exactly do point awarding effect notifying the set imparted points in FIG. 58, or than S2 configured granted points in FIG. 58 A point giving effect for informing a small number of points is executed. In the point-related processing shown in FIG. 58 , even when the point granting condition is satisfied and points are awarded, if it is decided not to be notified in the notice lottery of S4 or S6 in FIG. Is not executed, and no notification is given that points have been awarded. For this reason, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that more points than the total number of points specified from the executed point giving effect may be actually given.

  As a result, the first AT lottery is performed in accordance with the winning rate determined to be determined to be 1 or more and a larger number of navigation stocks at a higher rate, and the point giving effect is controlled by the AT. It is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the total number of points specified from. In addition, even when the total number of points specified from the point granting effect is relatively small, more points than the total number of points may actually be given, so a higher ratio of 1 or more and more It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the first AT lottery is performed according to the winning rate determined so as to be determined as a large number of navigation stocks, and that the AT is controlled.

Further, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 58 , a point granting effect for the grant point set in S2 of FIG. 58 is performed on the condition that the point granting condition is satisfied and the point is granted. For this reason, the above-mentioned feeling of expectation can be raised step by step every time the point giving effect is executed. In addition, in order for the player to predict the total number of points given, it is possible to add an interest that the player himself accumulates and stores the points specified from the executed point giving effects.

Further, in the difference number corresponding notification lottery in S4 of the point related processing, the table shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B is referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the granted point correctly have already been determined. It is determined with a probability corresponding to the difference between the total number of notification points specified from the executed point giving effect and the total number of granted points actually given. Further, in the difference number notification lottery, when the difference number is larger than when the difference number is small, it is determined to notify at a higher rate, and at a higher rate, points awarded or points closer to the given point are given. A notification point is determined so as to notify the user of the fact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large and the reliability of the point specified from the point providing effect from becoming too low.

Further, in the total lot notification lottery in S6 of the point related processing, the tables shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B are referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the granted point accurately is actually determined. It is determined with a probability corresponding to the total number of granted points. Furthermore, in the total number corresponding notification lottery, when the total number of granted points is smaller than when the total number of granted points is large, it is decided to report at a high rate, and at a high rate, the points that are closer to the granted point or the given points The notification point is determined so that the fact that it has been granted is notified. On the other hand, the smaller the total number of granted points, the higher the player's attention to whether or not the points have been notified. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention level with respect to the point granting effect is high, the player can have a sense of expectation and a sense of security corresponding to the given points at a high rate.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, when the player wins the Lip GR1 or Lip GR2 including the promoted replay and is operated in the operation mode for winning the promoted replay, the promoted replay wins and the replay winning probability Is controlled to an advantageous RT. On the other hand, in the advantageous RT, it is a procedure of winning either the rip GR3 or lip GR4 including the fall replay, or the left-pressed grape 1 including the small role, and winning the fall replay or stopping the special appearance. When operated, it is controlled to the normal gaming state by a fall replay winning or special stoppage.

  In addition, by winning the bonus, the game state can be won by Lip GR1 or Lip GR2 as in the normal game state, and in the same way as the advantageous RT, it is drawn on the winning line in preference to the bonus. Internal RT is controlled to increase the winning probability of replay.

Further, in the navigable period controlled in S34 or S35 of FIG. 66 by winning the simultaneous winning combination, a navigation effect is executed according to a predetermined probability. For this reason, in the navigable period, when the player wins Lip GR1 or Lip GR2, the promoted replay can be won intentionally, and advantageous RT can be controlled. Further, when winning the promotion replay, it is necessary to operate with an irregular push, but there is no disadvantage that a penalty is imposed even if the irregular push is performed during the navigation possible period. As a result, during the navigable period, it is possible to easily control the internal RT controlled by actually winning the bonus and the advantageous RT in which the winning probability of the replay is similarly increased, and the continuous performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for winning the bonus effectively.

  In addition, even if it is controlled to be advantageous RT in the navigation possible period, as described above, when winning one of Lip GR3 or Lip GR4 including fall replay, or left push grape 1 including a small role, Advantageous RT cannot be maintained because it is not possible to intentionally avoid the fall replay winning or the special stoppage. As a result, despite the fact that the bonus has not been won, the advantageous RT is maintained indefinitely after the navigable period has ended, thereby causing the inconvenience of winning the bonus. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the navigation effect is executed even after the advantageous RT is controlled in the navigable period. Thereby, since it is possible to maintain the advantageous RT during the navigable period, the player can have a sense of expectation over the navigable period.

Further, in this embodiment, when the normal replay is selected alone, the symbol combination of the normal replay is stopped on the winning line regardless of the operation mode. In addition, when a grape alone is selected, regardless of the operation mode, any of the grapes 1 to 8 and the same symbol combination with payout of nine pieces is stopped on the winning line. Thus, it can be said that the normal replay and grape are winning combinations that stop the symbol combination having the same function regardless of the operation mode. In the navigable period, as shown in S47 and S48 of FIG. 67 , the special navigation is performed in the same manner as the navigation effect at the time of the promotion replay winning at the time of the normal replay winning alone and the grape alone winning that stops the symbol combination having the same function. Production is performed. For this reason, the player can recognize that it is a navigation-enabled period by winning a normal replay or a grape without winning a promotion replay in spite of operating with the operation mode specified from the navigation effect. Yes, it can give you a sense of tension about winning the bonus.

In this embodiment, as shown in S33 to S35 of FIG. 66 , when winning the simultaneous winning combination, a different navigable period is set depending on whether or not the bonus is actually won, as shown in FIG. As shown in S46, the navigation effect is executed according to the probability corresponding to the set navigation possible period. Thereby, it is possible to guess the possibility of winning the bonus from the frequency of the navigation effect being executed in the navigable period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, Lips GR1 and 2, which are opportunities to shift from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state, and Lips GR3, 4 which are opportunities to transition from the advantageous RT to the ordinary gaming state, are each a winning combination only for replay. Therefore, the combination of replays to be won is set differently. For this reason, since the winning probabilities of Lip GR1 to LipGR4 can be adjusted for each gaming state, it is possible to easily design the probability of being controlled to the advantageous RT or the normal gaming state.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiments that can be applied to the present invention will be described.

  In the above-described embodiment, the combination of the winning combination including the promotion replay and the winning combination including the fall replay are the same combination so that the promotion GR and the penalty replay are included in Lip GR1 and Lip GR2. As described above, the example in which the combination of winning combinations is determined. However, the combination of the winning combination including the promotion replay may not include the penalty replay, and the combination of the winning combination including the penalty replay may not include the promotion replay.

  As a combination of winning combinations including promotion replay, for example, a combination of a winning combination of normal replay + promotion replay and a winning combination of normal replay + promotion replay + control replay are defined. May be. In addition, as a combination of winning combination including penalty replay, for example, a combination of winning combination of normal replay + penalty replay and a combination of winning combination of normal replay + penalty replay + control replay are defined. It may be. The reel control in this case may be as follows. For example, regardless of whether a winning combination including a promotion replay or a penalty replay is won, a normal replay is awarded when operated with a left press.

  Further, when a winning combination of normal replay + promotion replay is won, promotion replay is won by pressing the middle and normal replay is won by pressing right. Further, when a winning combination of normal replay + promotion replay + control replay is won, normal replay is won by middle pressing, and promotion replay is won by right pressing.

  Also, when a winning combination of normal replay + penalty replay is won, a penalty replay is won by pressing the middle and a normal replay is won by pressing right. When the winning combination of normal replay + penalty replay + control replay is won, the normal replay is won by pressing the middle and the fall replay is won by pressing the right.

  As a result, as long as it is operated in the common operation mode of the left push, the normal replay can be won and the normal game state can be maintained in the normal game state, and the promotion replay can be performed according to the winning combination. The operation mode for winning a prize and the operation mode for winning a penalty replay can be different, and the operation mode for winning a promotion replay is the same as one of the operation modes for winning a penalty replay. Therefore, there is a risk of being controlled by the penalty RT when the navigation effect is not being executed.

In the preparation mode in the above-described embodiment, the explanation has been given of the example in which the lip GR1 and the lip GR2 including the promotion replay and the penalty replay are not read out as the lottery object combination and are not won. Further, the configuration may be such that Lip GR2 is read out as a lottery target combination, won with a predetermined probability, and won. In such a configuration, for example, in the preparation mode, when the promotion replay is won, it may be controlled to the advantageous RT, and when the penalty replay is won, the penalty RT may be controlled. In this case, in the preparation mode, when operated in a mode other than the common operation mode, the risk of being controlled by the penalty RT is imposed, and the same processing as S53 to S56 in FIG. 68 is performed, so that a penalty is imposed. Anyway.

  In the above-described embodiment, the small winning combination such as cherry 1 or cherry 2 has been described as an example of the simultaneous winning combination that is triggered in the navigation possible period. However, the simultaneous winning combination that becomes an opportunity to be controlled during the navigable period is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a re-gamer.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the RT is not controlled by the RT whose probability of replay has been improved by winning the simultaneous winning combination has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the bonus winning is achieved by winning the simultaneous winning combination. When there is not, you may comprise so that it may control for RT (for example, 5 games) for presentation RT which the probability of replay improved. In addition, the above-described continuous effect may be executed over a predetermined period controlled by the effect RT so as to give a sense of expectation that the bonus has been won.

  It should be noted that after the effect RT is finished, the normal gaming state is controlled. On the other hand, even when it is advantageous RT, it can win a simultaneous winning combination. For this reason, when the simultaneous winning combination is won in the advantageous RT, there is a problem that the special game is controlled to the normal gaming state via the effect RT even if the winning line is not stopped. For this reason, in the case of the configuration as described above, in the advantageous RT, the simultaneous winning combination is always read out as the lottery target combination at the same time as the bonus so that the simultaneous winning combination wins only 100% simultaneously with the bonus. May be. Thereby, a premier value can be added to the simultaneous winning combination during the advantageous RT, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Similarly, when the penalty is RT, the player can win the simultaneous winning combination. For this reason, when a simultaneous winning combination is won in the penalty RT, there is an inconvenience that the game is controlled to the normal gaming state via the effect RT even if the bonus is not won and the predetermined number of games is not consumed. Therefore, when configured as described above, in the penalty RT, the simultaneous winning combination is always read out as a lottery target combination at the same time as the bonus so that the simultaneous winning combination wins only 100% simultaneously with the bonus. May be. Thereby, a premier value can be added to the simultaneous winning combination during the penalty RT, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the embodiment described above, as the simultaneous winning combination that is controlled during the navigation possible period, BB1 is simultaneously elected with Cherry 1 + Cherry 2 + 1 Single-acting 1, BB2 is simultaneously elected with Cherry 1 + Cherry 2, and BB3 is Cherry 1 Although the example of simultaneous winning is described, the combination of the bonus to be simultaneously won and the simultaneous winning combination is not limited to this. For example, when BB1 to BB5 win simultaneously with cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1 single combination 1, BB2 May be set in such a combination that BB3 may win simultaneously with cherry 1 when winning simultaneously with cherry 1 + cherry 2.

  In the above-described embodiment, in addition to the penalty of incurring the risk of being controlled by the penalty RT, on the condition that the navigation effect is not executed and the operation is performed by an irregular push other than the common operation mode, the penalty is imposed. The example which controls to a period and imposes various penalties over a fixed period was demonstrated. However, the penalty imposed when operated with an irregular push other than the common operation mode may be only a penalty that imposes a risk controlled by the penalty RT, and whether or not the game is controlled by the AT It may not be imposed on various penalties that are disadvantageous to the person.

  In addition to the penalty of incurring the risk controlled by the penalty RT, in the case of imposing various penalties that are disadvantageous to the player whether or not it is controlled by the AT, other examples of the various penalties For example, an AT lottery that has a low degree of advantage for the player when an AT lottery condition is satisfied may be performed. For example, when the AT lottery condition is satisfied, the probability of acquiring the navigation stock or the probability of acquiring a larger number of navigation stocks is increased as the number of times is increased according to the number of times the anomaly was pressed after the previous AT lottery. You may perform AT lottery so that it may become low. Alternatively, a predetermined number of points awarded for the first AT lottery may be subtracted every time an irregular pressing is performed.

Also, in the penalty period, in addition to the penalty that the non-AT game number counter is not added as shown in S22 of FIG. 65 , a penalty that does not give a point even if a point grant condition is satisfied, or an AT lottery condition is satisfied Even though an example of imposing a penalty for not performing an AT lottery has been described, only one of these penalties may be imposed. For example, in the penalty period, only the penalty that the non-AT game number counter is not added may be imposed. In addition, each time it is controlled during the penalty period, it may be possible to randomly draw which kind of penalty is imposed and to impose the winning penalty.

  Further, an example has been described in which the penalty period ends when the game is consumed a predetermined number of times. However, the penalty period is not limited to a game that ends when the game is completed a predetermined number of times, and may be ended when the AT lottery condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times (for example, once). For example, even if the AT lottery condition is satisfied in the penalty period, the penalty period may be ended by not performing the AT lottery according to the AT lottery condition.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in S33 to S35 in FIG. 66 , an example of controlling to a navigation-enabled period with a controlled period or a different navigation performance execution probability depending on whether or not a bonus is won. Although it demonstrated, not only this but according to the kind of simultaneous winning combination, you may comprise so that it may control to the navigation possible period from which the period controlled and the navigation production execution probability differ. For example, a special navigation period may be set at a higher rate when winning a bonus 1 and a winning combination of cherry 1 + cherry 2 + 1 single winning combination than when winning another simultaneous winning combination. good. As a result, it is possible to control the navigation possible period in conjunction with the expectation for winning the bonus.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example of controlling to RB1 when BB1 to BB3 and controlling to RB2 when BB4 or 5 has been described, but the same RB is controlled regardless of the type of BB. It may be configured. For example, you may comprise so that it may control to RB1 irrespective of the kind of BB. In this case, when controlled to BB, the bonus is such that a point can be always granted, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the embodiment described above, in the notice lottery in S4 and S6 of FIG. 58 , the advantage is lower for the player than the awarded points set in S2, that is, points below the given points are determined as the notice points. explained. However, if the notification points determined in the notification lottery in S4 and S6 in FIG. 58 are determined from points whose total number of notification points is not equal to or greater than the total number of granted points even after notification, S2 The player may be configured such that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than the grant points set in step 1, that is, more points than the grant points are determined as notification points.

FIG. 69 is an example of a table used in the notification lottery, and is a diagram for explaining a table in which more points than the given points can be determined as notification points in the difference number compatible notification lottery.

Also in the difference number corresponding notification lottery in this modification, with reference to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 69 (a), a lottery is performed as to whether or not points are notified according to the difference number. Difference number correspondence table A of FIG. 69 (a) is omitted because it is same as the table of FIG. 61 (a).

When it is decided to notify by referring to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 69 (a), the granted points set in S2 with reference to the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. 69 (b) . A lottery for determining the notification points is performed according to the difference number.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “0 to 1”, the total number of reporting points after reporting the current reporting point at a rate of 100% is given as the reporting point. It is determined that the post-notification difference number is “0”, which is the difference from the total number of granted points to which the given points are added. Specifically, the notification points are (difference number−difference number after notification + giving points). In this case, if the difference number is “1”, the notification point is determined as (1−0 + 1) = point “2”. In this way, more points than the given points are notified.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “2-3”, the post-notification difference number is determined to be “0” at a rate of 15%, and “1” at a rate of 25%. ”And“ 2 ”at a rate of 60%.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “4”, the post-notification difference number is determined to be “1” at a rate of 10% and is set to “2” at a rate of 20%. It is determined to be “3” at a rate of 30% and “4” at a rate of 40%.

  Hereinafter, similarly, the post-notification difference number is determined according to the distribution rate specified from the granted point and the difference number, and the notification point is determined by calculating (difference number−post-notification difference number + grant point). The

  For example, when the granted point is “3” and the difference number is “3”, and “1” is determined as the difference number after notification, as the notification point, (3-1 + 3) = point “5” To be determined.

  As described above, when a lottery is performed using a table in which more points than the granted points can be determined as notification points, for example, even when the difference number becomes too large, the player is more likely than the granted points. By reporting a point with a high degree of advantage as a reporting point, the difference number can be reduced. For this reason, it is possible to easily improve the reliability of the total number of notification points.

In the total number corresponding notification lottery in the above-described embodiment, an example in which lottery is performed according to the total number of granted points updated in S10 of FIG. 58 has been described. However, the total number corresponding notification lottery may be configured to perform lottery according to the total number of notification points updated in S9 of FIG . In the total lot notification lottery in this case, the tables shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and (b) are referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the granted point accurately are notified so far. The probability is determined according to the total number of points. Further, in the total number corresponding notification lottery in this case, it is determined to notify at a high rate when the total number of notification points is smaller than when the total number of notification points is large, and at a high rate, depending on the grant points or the grant points The notification point is determined so as to notify that a close point has been given. On the other hand, the smaller the total number of notification points, the higher the degree of attention the player has on whether or not the points have been notified. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention level with respect to the point granting effect is high, the player can have a sense of expectation and a sense of security corresponding to the given points at a high rate.

  In the point-related processing in the above-described embodiment, even if the total number of granted points updated in S10 is the upper limit, if the total number of notification points updated in S9 is not the upper limit, the processing after S3 is executed. You may comprise so that. Thereby, even after the total number of granted points has reached the upper limit, when the total number of notification points has not reached the upper limit, the same control as before the total number of given points has reached the upper limit is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the point giving effect is not executed after the total number of given points reaches the upper limit. Note that when the total number of notification points reaches the upper limit, the point-related processing may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed.

  The example in which the fall replay that is the re-gamer is set as the winning combination that triggers the advantageous RT in the above-described embodiment has been described. However, the winning combination that triggers the termination of the advantageous RT is not limited to the re-playing combination, but may be a predetermined small combination, a single bonus that controls the next one game as a bonus by winning.

  It may be a process of clearing (for example, “0”) the number of navigation stock when the bonus is won with the number of navigation stock remaining, or a process of carrying over until the bonus ends. There may be a process for subtracting a predetermined number, a process for adding a predetermined number, and a process for adding and adding a predetermined number. The determined processing may be performed. Thereby, the variation when a bonus is won in a state where the number of navigation stocks remains is increased, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the number of awarded points is not subtracted has been described. However, a predetermined number of points is subtracted from the number of awarded points on condition that a predetermined subtraction condition (for example, winning a specific winning combination) is won. You may do it. In this case, the number of points actually subtracted may be notified as the number of subtracted points, or the number of points larger than the number of points actually subtracted may be notified. As for whether to notify the number of points actually subtracted or the number of points greater than the number of points actually subtracted, at least one of grant points, difference numbers, grant points, report points Accordingly, it may be configured to determine with different probabilities. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the point being subtracted even after the point is awarded, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting the number of bets and giving game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when 3 is set as the number of bets in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and slots for setting bets using game balls are used. It may be a machine or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, and a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls paid out by the ball payout device It is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out by winning.

  In the above-described embodiments, examples in which the grant points are used for various lotteries have been described. However, the grant points may be used for executing the navigation effect regardless of the effect state. The navigation effect may be executed a number of times according to the points (the navigation effect is executed once for the point 1), and the navigation effect is given when the player falls for a fall replay while the number of games corresponding to the points is consumed. (Navigation effect can be performed over 3 games for point 1) or whether the navigation effect is performed each time a fall replay is won according to the ratio according to the amount of points granted It is also possible to execute a navigation effect when a winning lottery is performed (when the total number of granted points is larger, a higher probability is determined as a probability used for the navigation effect lottery).

In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the example in which the winning operation mode of the promotion replay and the avoiding operation mode of the penalty replay are respectively the pressing order of the stop operation has been described. Not limited to this, the stop operation timing may be included. For example, penalty replay 1 (white 7-replay-replay), penalty replay 2 (black 7-replay-replay), and penalty replay 3 (BAR-replay-replay) are provided as penalty replays. When the replay other than the above and each of the fall replays 1 to 3 can be won at the same time, the timing at which the left symbols constituting the simultaneously selected penalty replay are not stopped on the winning line The operation mode in which the stop operation is performed becomes the penalty replay avoidance operation mode. Further, the prize winning operation mode of promotion replay and the avoidance operation mode of penalty replay are not limited to those in the pressing order or only in the stopping operation timing, but may be in the pressing order + stopping operation timing.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a special event, which is a missed event at the time of winning a grape, is led to the winning line and falls from the preparation mode or advantageous RT to the normal gaming state has been described. The trigger for the transition from the advantageous RT to the normal gaming state is not limited to this. For example, a prize may be awarded to a specific small role (for example, watermelon).

  In the embodiment described above, an example in which a promotion game is promoted to an advantageous RT by winning a promotion replay has been described. However, the opportunity for promotion from a normal gaming state to an advantageous RT is not limited to this. It may be a symbol combination at the time of missing. It may be that a predetermined combination of symbols that is generated only when the cherry 1 + cherry 2 is won and a cherry winning is avoided is derived.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the AT mode for one navigation stock is terminated by using 50 games as a specific period in the AT mode during RT has been described. However, the specific period is not limited to a period of game digestion for a predetermined number of times, but a period of game digestion for a number of times determined by random lottery using a random number or the like from a plurality of types of times, won for fall replay Then, a period until the number of times that the navigation effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a period until the number of times a specific winning combination (for example, Cherry 1) is won reaches a predetermined number, or the like may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the normal gaming state, when an operation mode other than the common operation mode is used, if the player wins Lip GR1 or Lip GR2, the player wins the promotion replay with a probability of 1/2. The example in which the probability of winning a penalty replay with the probability of, that is, the probability of winning a penalty replay is the same as the probability of winning a promotion replay has been described. However, when operating in an operation mode other than the common operation mode, the probability of winning a penalty replay may be higher than the probability of winning a promotion replay.

  When the combination of winning combinations is configured so that normal replay, promotion replay, and penalty replay are won at the same time as in the embodiment described above, when operating in an operation mode other than the common operation mode The reel control may be configured such that the ratio of the operation mode for winning the penalty replay is higher than the ratio of the operation mode for winning the promotion replay. When operating in the operation mode, the probability of winning a penalty replay is higher than the probability of winning a promotion replay, and it is easier to control the penalty RT and the possibility of a risk being raised.

  In the embodiment described above, the internal lottery is performed at the timing when the detection signal of the start switch 7 is input, but the processing for performing the lottery related to the game is performed at the timing when the predetermined signal is input. The lottery related to the game is not necessarily required at the timing when the predetermined signal is input. For example, the random number circuit latches the numerical data at the timing when the predetermined signal is input, acquires the numerical data latched by the random number circuit at the timing when the predetermined signal is input, and stores the random value. If the data is stored temporarily in the work, and then the numerical data stored in the random value work is read out and the lottery related to the game is performed, the numerical data latched from the random value circuit is obtained, and the random value work The process stored in the game corresponds to the process for performing the lottery related to the game, and it is not necessary to perform the lottery related to the game using the numerical data at the timing when the predetermined signal is input.

  In addition, it should be thought that the Example disclosed this time is an illustration and restrictive at no points. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 start switch 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch 41 main control unit 91 sub control unit 505 CPU
506 ROM
507 RAM
509 Random number circuit 559A Random value register

Claims (1)

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After displaying the variable display unit in a variable manner, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the winning to occur before the display result is derived;
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
A state control means for controlling the favorable favorable state taking the player in accordance with the display result derived by the deriving control means,
A notification condition is set at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game, and the determination result of the prior determination unit is one of a plurality of types of notification target determination results from which an advantageous display result can be derived according to the operation procedure of the derivation operation unit A notification control means for performing control for notifying the result information according to the notification target determination result according to the notification condition ;
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous for the player when the number of elapsed games reaches the prescribed number of games;
With
The state control means includes
When the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result of the notification target determination results , an advantageous display result is derived by being operated in a first procedure corresponding to the first determination result, The advantageous display result is not derived by being operated in a procedure other than the first procedure,
When the determination result of the prior determination means is the second determination result of the notification target determination results , the operation is performed in a second procedure corresponding to the second determination result different from the first procedure. deriving a favorable display results, not derive the beneficial results displayed the by being operated in the procedure other than the second procedure,
Regardless of whether the determination result of the prior determination means is the notification target determination result , when operated in a common procedure that is neither the first procedure nor the second procedure, the advantageous display result is not derived ,
In addition, the slot machine
When the notification control means does not notify the result information according to the determination result of the prior determination means, and the operation is performed in a procedure other than the common procedure, the procedure is the first procedure and the second procedure. It is possible to perform disadvantageous control that is disadvantageous for a player who is not performed when operated by the common procedure in any of the procedures,
The privilege granting unit does not grant the privilege even if the number of games that have passed reaches the specified number of games when the disadvantageous control is performed before the number of games that have passed reaches the specified number of games. A slot machine featuring.

Images